338
2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For a printed owner's manual, click on authorized manuals or go to www.helminc.com. Contents Owner's Identification Form Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... i A Few Words About Safety ................................................................................................................. ii Important Handling Information..................................................................................................... iii Your Vehicle at a Glance ..................................................................................................................... 2 Driver and Passenger Safety .............................................................................................................. 5 Proper use and care of your vehicle's seat belts, and Supplemental Restraint System. Instruments and Controls ................................................................................................................. 63 Instrument panel indicator and gauge, and how to use dashboard and steering column controls. Comfort and Convenience Features .............................................................................................. 117 How to operate the climate control system, the audio system, and other convenience features. Before Driving.................................................................................................................................. 157 What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to load luggage and other cargo. Driving .............................................................................................................................................. 171 The proper way to start the engine, shift the transmission, and park, plus towing a trailer. Maintenance ..................................................................................................................................... 207 The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your vehicle to the dealer. Appearance Care.............................................................................................................................. 267 Tips on cleaning and protecting your vehicle. Things to look for if your vehicle ever needs body repairs. Taking Care of the Unexpected ...................................................................................................... 275 This section covers several problems motorists sometimes experience, and how to handle them. Technical Information..................................................................................................................... 303 ID numbers, dimensions, capacities, and technical information. Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada) ................................................................ 319 A summary of the warranties covering your new Acura, and how to contact us. Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)...................................................................................................... 323 How to order manuals and other technical literature. Index...................................................................................................................................................... I Service Information Summary A summary of information you need when you pull up to the fuel pump.

2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

  • Upload
    others

  • View
    15

  • Download
    0

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For a printed owner's manual, click on authorized manuals or go to www.helminc.com. Contents

Owner's Identification Form Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... i A Few Words About Safety ................................................................................................................. ii

Important Handling Information .....................................................................................................iii

Your Vehicle at a Glance .....................................................................................................................2 Driver and Passenger Safety ..............................................................................................................5 Proper use and care of your vehicle's seat belts, and Supplemental Restraint System. Instruments and Controls ................................................................................................................. 63 Instrument panel indicator and gauge, and how to use dashboard and steering column controls. Comfort and Convenience Features .............................................................................................. 117 How to operate the climate control system, the audio system, and other convenience features. Before Driving.................................................................................................................................. 157 What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to load luggage and other cargo. Driving .............................................................................................................................................. 171 The proper way to start the engine, shift the transmission, and park, plus towing a trailer. Maintenance ..................................................................................................................................... 207 The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your vehicle to the dealer. Appearance Care.............................................................................................................................. 267 Tips on cleaning and protecting your vehicle. Things to look for if your vehicle ever needs body repairs. Taking Care of the Unexpected ...................................................................................................... 275 This section covers several problems motorists sometimes experience, and how to handle them. Technical Information..................................................................................................................... 303 ID numbers, dimensions, capacities, and technical information. Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada) ................................................................ 319 A summary of the warranties covering your new Acura, and how to contact us. Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)...................................................................................................... 323 How to order manuals and other technical literature. Index...................................................................................................................................................... I

Service Information Summary A summary of information you need when you pull up to the fuel pump.

Page 2: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

This Owner’s Manual should be considereda permanent part of the vehicle, and shouldremain with the vehicle when it is sold.

The information and specifications includedin this publication were in effect at the timeof approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,Ltd. reserves the right, however, todiscontinue or change specifications ordesign at any time without notice andwithout incurring any obligation whatsoever.

This Owner’s Manual covers all models ofthe Element. You may find descriptions ofequipment and features that are not on yourparticular model.

Owner’s Identif ication

OWNER

ADDRESS

V. I. N.

DELIVERY DATE

DEALER NAME DEALER NO.

ADDRESS

OWNER’S SIGNATURE

DEALER’S SIGNATURE

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

(Date sold to original retail purchaser)

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

Page 3: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new Honda is toread this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls andconvenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle soyou can refer to it at any time.

Several warranties protect your new Honda. Read the warranty bookletthoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rightsand responsibilities.

Maintaining your vehicle according to the schedules given in this manualhelps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment.When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that your Hondadealer’s staff is specially trained in servicing the many systems unique toyour Honda. Your Honda dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will bepleased to answer any questions and concerns.

As you read this manual, you willfind information that is preceded bya symbol. Thisinformation is intended to help youavoid damage to your Honda, otherproperty, or the environment.

California Proposition 65 Warning

This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

Congratulations! Your selection of a 2003 Honda Element was a wiseinvestment. It will give you years of driving pleasure.

Introduction

WARNING:

i

Page 4: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

--

--

Your safety, and the safety of others,is very important. And operating thisvehicle safely is an importantresponsibility.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,including:

on the vehicle.

To help you make informeddecisions about safety, we haveprovided operating procedures andother information on labels and inthis manual. This information alertsyou to potential hazards that couldhurt you or others.

Of course, it is not practical orpossible to warn you about all thehazards associated with operating ormaintaining your vehicle. You mustuse your own good judgement.

These signal words mean:

preceded by a safety alert symbol and one ofthree signal words: , , or .

such as Driver and Passenger Safety.how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.

such as Important Safety Reminders or ImportantSafety Precautions.

This entire book is filled with important safety information please read itcarefully.

A Few Words About Safety

Safety LabelsSafety Messages

Safety SectionInstructions

Safety Headings

DANGER WARNING CAUTION

ii

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be HURT if you don’t followinstructions.

Page 5: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

These advantages come at some cost. Because your vehicle is taller and rides higher off the ground, it has a highcenter of gravity. This means your vehicle can tip or roll over if you make abrupt turns. Utility vehicles have asignificantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantlymore likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. As a reminder, make sure you and your passengers always wearseat belts.

For information on how to reduce the risk of rollover, read ‘‘Driving Guidelines’’ on page of this manual and thesection on page . Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or an

accident.

Your Element has higher ground clearance than a passenger vehicle designed for use only on pavement. Higherground clearance has many advantages for off-highway driving. It allows you to travel over bumps, obstacles, andrough terrain. It also provides good visibility so you can anticipate problems earlier.

172200Off-Highway Guidelines

Important Handling Information

iii

Page 6: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Your Vehicle at a Glance

2

POWER DOORLOCK SWITCH

MIRROR CONTROLSGAUGESINDICATORS (P.65)

(P.72)AUDIO SYSTEM

HEATING/COOLINGCONTROLS

PARKING BRAKE

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES

A/T model is shown.

HOOD RELEASEHANDLE

(P.87)

(P.103)

(P.160)

(P.106) (P.126, 137)

(P.118)

(P.111)

Page 7: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.:

Your Vehicle at a Glance

3

SHIFT LEVERHEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS(P.76, 77)

WINDSHIELDWIPERS/WASHERS

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER(P.81)

TILT ADJUSTMENT

A/T model is shown.

CRUISE CONTROL

HAZARD WARNINGLIGHTS

(P.153)

(P.82)

(P.81)

(P.78, 79)(P.176, 179)

HORN

Page 8: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

4

Page 9: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

This section gives you importantinformation about how to protectyourself and your passengers. Itshows you how to use seat beltsproperly. It explains your Supple-mental Restraint System. And it tellsyou how to properly restrain infantsand children in your vehicle.

.........Important Safety Precautions . 6.......Your Vehicle’s Safety Features . 7

.......................................Seat Belts . 8.........................................Airbags . 10

.....................Seats & Seat-Backs . 11..........................Head Restraints . 11

..................................Door Locks . 11........Pre-Drive Safety Checklist . 12

............................Protecting Adults . 13.....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 13

...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 13............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 15

...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 165. Fasten and Position the Seat

.....................................Belts . 17....6. Adjust the Steering Wheel . 20

7. Maintain a Proper Sitting................................Position . 20

.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 21...Additional Safety Precautions . 22

........................Protecting Children . 24All Children Must Be

...............................Restrained . 24Children Should Sit in the Back

...........................................Seat . 25The Passenger’s Front Airbag

Poses Serious Risks to..............................Children . 25

If You Must Drive with Several...................................Children . 28

If a Child Requires Close..................................Attention . 28

...Additional Safety Precautions . 29General Guidelines for Using

...............................Child Seats . 29.......................Protecting Infants . 34

.........Protecting Small Children . 38.......Protecting Larger Children . 42

Using Child Seats with.....................................Tethers . 46

.............................Using LATCH . 47Additional Information About Your

.................................Seat Belts . 50..Seat Belt System Components . 50

......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 50Automatic Seat Belt

...............................Tensioners . 52...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 53

Additional Information About Your.....................................Airbags . 54

........................SRS Components . 54How Your Front Airbags

.........................................Work . 54...How Your Side Airbags Work . 56

How the SRS Indicator Light.......................................Works . 57

How the Side Airbag Cutoff...........Indicator Light Works . 58

.............................Airbag Service . 59...Additional Safety Precautions . 59

.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 60...................................Safety Labels . 61

Driver and Passenger Safety

Driver and Passenger Safety 5

Page 10: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

You’ll find many safetyrecommendations throughout thissection, and throughout this manual.The recommendations on this pageare the ones we consider to be themost important.

Excessive speed is a major factor incrash injuries and deaths. Generally,the higher the speed the greater therisk, but serious accidents can alsooccur at lower speeds. Never drivefaster than is safe for currentconditions, regardless of themaximum speed posted.

While airbags can save lives, theycan cause serious or fatal injuries tooccupants who sit too close to them,or are not properly restrained.Infants, young children, and shortadults are at the greatest risk. Besure to follow all instructions andwarnings in this manual. (See page

.)

Having a tire blowout or amechanical failure can be extremelyhazardous. To reduce the possibilityof such problems, check your tirepressures and condition frequently,and perform all regularly scheduledmaintenance. (See page .)

A seat belt is your best protection inall types of collisions. Airbagssupplement seat belts, but airbagsare designed to inflate only in amoderate to severe frontal collision.So even though your vehicle isequipped with airbags, make sureyou and your passengers alwayswear your seat belts, and wear themproperly. (See page .)

Children are safest when they areproperly restrained in the back seat,not the front seat. A child who is toosmall for a seat belt must be properlyrestrained in a child safety seat. (Seepage .)

Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Evenone drink can reduce your ability torespond to changing conditions, andyour reaction time gets worse withevery additional drink. So don’t drinkand drive, and don’t let your friendsdrink and drive, either.

17

24

10

210

Driver and Passenger Safety

Important Safety Precautions

Always Wear Your Seat Belt

Be Aware of Airbag Hazards Control Your Speed

Keep Your Vehicle in SafeCondition

Restrain All Children

Don’t Drink and Drive

6

Page 11: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Your vehicle is equipped with manyfeatures that work together toprotect you and your passengersduring a crash.

Some safety features do not requireany action on your part. Theseinclude a strong steel frameworkthat forms a safety cage around thepassenger compartment; front andrear crush zones that are designed tocrumple and absorb energy during acrash; a collapsible steering column;and seat belt tensioners thatautomatically tighten the front seatbelts in the event of a crash.

CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safety

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

7

(1)

(2)

(2)

(3) (4)

(5)

(8) (6)(9)

(7)

(10)

(1) Safety Cage(2) Crush Zones(3) Seats & Seat-Backs(4) Head Restraints(5) Collapsible Steering Column(6) Seat Belts(7) Front Airbags(8) Side Airbags (EX model)(9) Front Seat Belt Tensioners(10) Door Locks

Page 12: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

These safety features are designedto reduce the severity of injuries in acrash. However, you and yourpassengers can’t take full advantageof these safety features unless youremain sitting in a proper positionand

In fact, some safetyfeatures can contribute to injuries ifthey are not used properly.

Seat belts are the single mosteffective safety device for adults andlarger children. (Infants and smallerchildren must be properly restrainedin child seats.)

In addition, most states and allCanadian provinces require you towear seat belts.

For your safety, and the safety ofyour passengers, your vehicle isequipped with seat belts in all seatingpositions.

Your seat belt system alsoincludes a light on the

instrument panel to remind you andyour passengers to fasten your seatbelts.

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Seat Belts

always wear your seat beltsproperly.

Why Wear Seat Belts

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

8

Page 13: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

When properly worn, seat belts:

Keep you connected to the vehicleso you can take advantage of thevehicle’s built-in safety features.

Help keep you from being thrownagainst the inside of the vehicleand against other occupants.

Keep you from being thrown outof the vehicle.

Help keep you in a good positionshould the airbags ever deploy. Agood position reduces the risk ofinjury from an inflating airbag, andallows you to get the bestadvantage from the airbag.

Of course, seat belts cannotcompletely protect you in everycrash. But in most cases, seat beltscan reduce your risk of seriousinjury.

Always wearyour seat belt, and make sure youwear it properly.

Help protect you in almost everytype of crash, including side andrear impacts and rollovers. In arollover crash, an unbelted personis more likely to die than a personwearing a seat belt.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

What you should do:

9

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, evenif you have airbags.

Be sure you and yourpassengers always wear seatbelts and wear them properly.

Page 14: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

The most important things you needto know about your airbags are:

Always wearyour seat belt properly, and situpright and as far back as possiblefrom the steering wheel ordashboard.

To do their job, airbags mustinflate with tremendous force andspeed. So while airbags help savelives, they can cause minor injuries,or more serious or even fatalinjuries if occupants are notproperly restrained or sittingproperly.

They are designed to supplementthe seat belts.

Your vehicle has a SupplementalRestraint System (SRS) with frontairbags to help protect the heads andchests of the driver and a front seatpassenger during a moderate tosevere frontal collision.

Your vehicle also has side airbags tohelp protect the upper torso of thedriver or a front seat passengerduring a moderate to severe sideimpact.

Only on models equipped with sideairbags

Airbags

Driver and Passenger Safety

What you should do:

Airbags can pose serious hazards.

Airbags offer no protection in rearimpacts, rollovers, or minorfrontal or side collisions.

Airbags do not replace seat belts.

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

10

Page 15: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Your vehicle’s seats are designed tokeep you in a comfortable, uprightposition so you can take fulladvantage of the protection offeredby seat belts and the energyabsorbing materials in the seats.

Head restraints can help protect youfrom whiplash and other injuries. Formaximum protection, the back ofyour head should rest against thecenter of the head restraint.

Reclining a seat-back too far reducesthe seat belt’s effectiveness andincreases the chance that the seat’soccupant will slide under the seatbelt in a crash and be seriouslyinjured.

Move the frontseats as far back as possible, andkeep adjustable seat-backs in anupright position whenever thevehicle is moving.

Keeping your doors locked reducesthe chance of being thrown out ofthe vehicle during a crash. It alsohelps prevent occupants fromaccidentally opening a door andfalling out, and outsiders fromunexpectedly opening your doors.

How you adjust your seats and seat-backs can also affect your safety. Forexample, sitting too close to thesteering wheel or dashboardincreases the risk of you or yourpassenger being injured by strikingthe inside of the vehicle, or by aninflating airbag.

Seats & Seat-Backs

Head Restraints

Door LocksWhat you should do:

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

Driver and Passenger Safety 11

Page 16: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

To make sure you and yourpassengers get the maximumprotection from your vehicle’s safetyfeatures, check the following eachtime before you drive away:

All adults, and children who haveoutgrown child safety seats, arewearing their seat belts andwearing them properly (see page

).

Any infant or small child isproperly restrained in a child seatin the back seat (see page ).

Front seat occupants are sittingupright and as far back as possiblefrom the steering wheel anddashboard (see page ).

Seat-backs are upright (see page).

Head restraints are properlyadjusted (see page ).

All doors and the tailgate areclosed and locked (see page ).

All cargo is properly stored orsecured (see page ).

The rest of this section gives moredetailed information about how youcan maximize your safety.

Remember, however, that no safetysystem can prevent all injuries ordeaths that can occur in severecrashes, even when seat belts areproperly worn and the airbags deploy.

17

24

13

15

16

13

167

Pre-Drive Safety Checklist

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

Driver and Passenger Safety12

Page 17: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

The following pages provideinstructions on how to properlyprotect the driver and other adultoccupants.

These instructions also apply tochildren who have outgrown childseats and are large enough to wearlap/shoulder belts. (See page forimportant additional guidelines onhow to properly protect largerchildren.)

After everyone has entered thevehicle, be sure the doors andtailgate (including the hatch glass)are closed.

Your vehicle has a doormonitor light on the

instrument panel to indicate whenany door is not tightly closed.

Any driver who sits too close to thesteering wheel is at risk of beingseriously injured or killed by strikingthe steering wheel or from beingstruck by an inflating front airbagduring a crash.

Your vehicle also has atailgate and hatch open

indicator light on the instrumentpanel to indicate when the tailgate orthe hatch is not tightly closed.

For safety, locking the doors reducesthe chance that a passenger,especially a child, will open a doorwhile the vehicle is moving andaccidentally fall out. It also reducesthe chance of someone being thrownout of the vehicle during a crash.

For security, locked doors canprevent an outsider fromunexpectedly opening a door whenyou come to a stop.

See page for how to lock thedoors.

42

87

CONTINUED

Introduction

Close and Lock the Doors

Adjust the Front Seats

1.

2.

Protecting Adults

Driver and Passenger Safety 13

Page 18: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

See page for how to adjust thefront seats.

Once your seat is adjusted correctly,rock it back and forth to make surethe seat is locked in position.

Most shorter drivers can get farenough away from the steeringwheel and still reach the pedals.However, if you are concerned aboutsitting too close, we recommend thatyou investigate whether some typeof adaptive equipment may help.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that driversadjust the seat so the center of thechest is at least 10 inches (25 cm)away from the center of the steeringwheel. Also make sure your frontseat passenger moves the seat as farto the rear as possible.

To reduce the chance of injury, wearyour seat belt properly, sit uprightwith your back against the seat, andmove the seat away from thesteering wheel to the farthestdistance that allows you to maintainfull control of the vehicle.

92

Protecting Adults

Driver and Passenger Safety14

Sitting too close to a frontairbag can result in seriousinjury or death if the frontairbags inflate.

Always sit as far back from thefront airbags as possible.

Page 19: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

See page for how to adjust seat-backs.

A front passenger should also adjustthe seat-back to an upright position,but as far from the dashboard aspossible. A passenger who sits tooclose to the dashboard could beinjured if the front airbag inflates.

Reclining a seat-back so that theshoulder part of the belt no longerrests against the occupant’s chestreduces the protective capability ofthe belt. It also increases the chanceof sliding under the belt in a crashand being seriously injured. Thefarther a seat-back is reclined, thegreater the risk of injury.

Adjust the driver’s seat-back to acomfortable, upright position,leaving ample space between yourchest and the airbag cover in thecenter of the steering wheel. If yousit too close to the steering wheel,you could be injured if the frontairbag inflates.

92

Adjust the Seat-Backs3.

Protecting Adults

Driver and Passenger Safety 15

Reclining the seat-back too farcan result in serious injury ordeath in a crash.

Adjust the seat-back to anupright position and sit wellback in the seat.

Page 20: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Before driving, make sure everyonewith an adjustable head restraint hasproperly positioned the headrestraint. The restraint should bepositioned so the back of theoccupant’s head rests against thecenter of the restraint. A tallerperson should adjust the restraint ashigh as possible.

Properly adjusted head restraintswill help protect occupants fromwhiplash and other crash injuries.

See page for how to adjust thehead restraints.

94

Driver and Passenger Safety

Protecting Adults

Adjust the Head Restraints4.

16

Improperly positioning headrestraints reduces theireffectiveness and you can beseriously injured in a crash.

Make sure head restraints arein place and positioned properlybefore driving.

Page 21: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

CONTINUED

Position the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across your hips,then pull up on the shoulder part ofthe belt so the lap part fits snugly.This lets your strong pelvic bonestake the force of a crash and reducesthe chance of internal injuries.

Insert the latch plate into the buckle,then tug on the belt to make sure thebelt is securely latched. Also checkthat the belt is not twisted, because atwisted belt can cause seriousinjuries in a crash.

If necessary, pull up on the shoulderbelt again to remove any slack fromthe shoulder belt, then check thatthe belt rests across the center ofyour chest and over your shoulder.This spreads the forces of a crashover the strongest bones in yourupper body.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Protecting Adults

Fasten and Position the SeatBelts

5.

17

Improperly positioning the seatbelts can cause serious injuryor death in a crash.

Make sure all seat belts areproperly positioned beforedriving.

Page 22: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

This could causevery serious injuries in a crash.

If the seat belt touches or crossesyour neck, or if it crosses your arminstead of your shoulder, you need toadjust the seat belt anchor height.

To adjust the height of a front seatbelt anchor, squeeze the two releasebuttons and slide the anchor up ordown as needed (it has fourpositions).

Driver and Passenger Safety

Protecting Adults

Never place the shoulder portion of alap/shoulder belt under your arm orbehind your back.

18

RELEASE BUTTONS

Page 23: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

If a seat belt does not seem to workas it should, it may not protect theoccupant in a crash.

Anyone using a seat belt that isnot working properly can beseriously injured or killed. Have yourHonda dealer check the belt as soonas possible.

See page for additionalinformation about your seat beltsystem and how to take care of yourbelts.

50

Driver and Passenger Safety

Protecting Adults

No one shouldsit in a seat with an inoperative seatbelt.

19

Page 24: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Adjust the steering wheel, if needed,so that the wheel points toward yourchest, not toward your face.

Pointing the steering wheel towardyour chest provides optimalprotection from the airbag.

See page for how to adjust thesteering wheel.

Sitting improperly can increase thechance of injury during a crash. Forexample, if an occupant slouches,lies down, turns sideways, sitsforward, leans forward or sideways,or puts one or both feet up, thechance of injury during a crash isgreatly increased.

After all occupants have adjustedtheir seats and put on seat belts, it isvery important that they continue tosit upright, well back in their seats,with their feet on the floor, until thevehicle is parked and the engine isoff.

In addition, an occupant who is out ofposition in the front seat can beseriously or fatally injured bystriking interior parts of the vehicle,or by being struck by an inflatingfront airbag. Being struck by aninflating side airbag can result inpossibly serious injuries.

82

Driver and Passenger Safety

Protecting Adults

Adjust the Steering Wheel Maintain a Proper SittingPosition

6. 7.

20

Sitting improperly or out ofposition can result in seriousinjury or death in a crash.

Always sit upright, well back inthe seat, with your feet on thefloor.

Page 25: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Pregnant women should also situpright and as far back as possiblefrom the steering wheel ordashboard. This will reduce the riskof injuries to both the mother andher unborn child that can be causedby a crash or an inflating airbag.

Each time you have a check-up, askyour doctor if it’s okay for you todrive.

Because protecting the mother is thebest way to protect her unborn child,a pregnant woman should alwayswear a seat belt whenever she drivesor rides in a vehicle.

Remember to keep the lap portion ofthe belt as low as possible acrossyour hips.

Remember, to get the bestprotection from your vehicle’sairbags and other safety features,you must sit properly and wear yourseat belt properly.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Protecting Adults

Advice for Pregnant Women

21

Page 26: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

All passengersmust sit in locked, upright seatsand be properly restrained by seatbelts.

A passenger who is notwearing a seat belt during a crashor emergency stop can be thrownagainst the inside of the vehicle,against other occupants, or out ofthe vehicle.

If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

Devices intended to improveoccupant comfort or reposition theshoulder part of a seat belt canseverely compromise theprotective capability of the seatbelt and increase the chance ofserious injury in a crash.

Carrying hard or sharpobjects on your lap, or driving witha pipe or other sharp objects inyour mouth, can result in injuriesif your front airbag inflates.

Any objectattached to or placed on the coversmarked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’ in thecenter of the steering wheel andon top of the dashboard couldinterfere with the proper operationof the airbags. Or, if the airbagsinflate, the objects could bepropelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone.

Protecting Adults

Driver and Passenger Safety

Additional Safety PrecautionsNever let passengers ride in thecargo area or on top of a folded-down back seat.

Passengers should not stand up orchange seats while the vehicle ismoving.

Two people should never use thesame seat belt.

Do not put any accessories on seatbelts.

Do not place hard or sharp objectsbetween yourself and a frontairbag.

Do not attach or place objects onthe front airbag covers.

22

Page 27: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

If yourhands or arms are close to theairbag cover in the center of thesteering wheel or on top of thedashboard, they could be injured ifthe front airbag inflates.

If a side airbaginflates, a cup holder or other hardobject attached on or near thedoor could be propelled inside thevehicle and hurt someone.

Protecting Adults

Driver and Passenger Safety

Keep your hands and arms awayfrom the airbag covers.

On models with side airbags, donot attach hard objects on or neara front door.

23

Page 28: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Children depend on adults to protectthem. However, despite their bestintentions, many parents and otheradults may not know how toprotect young passengers. (See page

.)So if you have children, or if you everneed to drive with a grandchild orother children in your vehicle, besure to read this section.

To reduce the number of childdeaths and injuries, every state andCanadian province requires thatinfants and children be restrainedwhenever they ride in a vehicle.

Each year, many children are injuredor killed in vehicle crashes becausethey are either unrestrained or notproperly restrained. In fact, vehicleaccidents are the number one causeof death of children ages 12 andunder.

(See page .)

29

42

properly

All Children Must Be Restrained

Any child who is too small to wear aseat belt should be properlyrestrained in a child seat.

A larger child should always berestrained with a seat belt, and use abooster, if needed.

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety24

Children who are unrestrainedor improperly restrained can beseriously injured or killed in acrash.

Any child too small for a seatbelt should be properlyrestrained in a child seat. Alarger child should be properlyrestrained with a seat belt.

Page 29: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Front airbags have been designed tohelp protect adults in a moderate tosevere frontal collision. To do this,the passenger’s front airbag is quitelarge, and it inflates with tremendousspeed.

According to accident statistics,children of all ages and sizes aresafer when they are restrained in theback seat, not the front seat. TheNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenages 12 and under be properlyrestrained in the back seat.

In the back seat, children are lesslikely to be injured by striking hardinterior parts during a collision orhard braking. Also, children cannotbe injured by an inflating airbagwhen they ride in the back.

If you are not wearing aseat belt in a crash, you could bethrown forward into thedashboard and crush the child.

During acrash, the belt could press deepinto the child and cause veryserious injuries.

If you are wearing a seat belt, thechild can be torn from your armsduring a crash. For example, ifyour vehicle crashes into a parkedvehicle at 30 mph (48 km/h), a20-lb (9 kg) infant will become a600-lb (275 kg) force, and you willnot be able to hold on.

CONTINUED

The Passenger’s Front AirbagPoses Serious Risks to Children

Children Should Sit in the BackSeat

Additional Precautions to ParentsNever hold an infant or child onyour lap.

Never put a seat belt over yourselfand an infant or child.

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety 25

Page 30: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Ifthe airbag inflates, it can hit the backof the child seat with enough forceto kill or very seriously injure aninfant.

If the vehicle seat istoo far forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating front airbag can strike thechild with enough force to kill orvery seriously injure a small child.

Whenever possible,larger children should sit in the backseat, in a booster seat if needed, andbe properly restrained with a seatbelt.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Protecting Children

InfantsNever put a rear-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag.

Placing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag canbe hazardous.

Small Children Larger ChildrenChildren who have outgrown childseats are also at risk of being injuredor killed by an inflating passenger’sfront airbag.

26

Page 31: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

To remind you of the passenger’sfront airbag hazards, and thatchildren must be properly restrainedin the back seat, your vehicle haswarning labels on the dashboard andon the driver’s and front passenger’svisors. Please read and follow theinstructions on these labels.

To remind you of the front airbaghazards, your vehicle has warninglabels on the driver’s and frontpassenger’s visors. Please read andfollow the instructions on theselabels.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Protecting Children

U.S. Models Canadian Models

27

Page 32: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Place the largest child in the frontseat, provided the child is largeenough to wear a seat beltproperly (see page ).

Move the vehicle seat as far to therear as possible (see page ).

Your vehicle has two seatingpositions in the back seat wherechildren can be properly restrained.

If you ever have to carry more thantwo children in your vehicle:

Many parents say they prefer to putan infant or small child in the frontpassenger seat so they can watch thechild, or because the child requiresattention.

Placing a child in the front seatexposes the child to hazards fromthe passenger’s front airbag, andpaying close attention to a childdistracts the driver from theimportant tasks of driving, placingboth of you at risk.

If a child requires physical attentionor frequent visual contact, westrongly recommend that anotheradult ride with the child in the backseat. The back seat is far safer for achild than the front.

Have the child sit upright and wellback in the seat (see page ).

Make sure the seat belt is properlypositioned and secured (see page

).

42

13

20

17

Driver and Passenger Safety

Protecting Children

If You Must Drive with SeveralChildren

If a Child Requires CloseAttention

28

Page 33: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

CONTINUED

The following pages give generalguidelines for selecting and installingchild seats for infants and smallchildren.

Even very youngchildren learn how to unlockvehicle doors, turn on the ignition,and open the tailgate or hatch,which can lead to accidental injuryor death.

Childrenwho play in vehicles canaccidentally get trapped inside thevehicle. Teach your children not toplay in or around vehicles.

Leaving children withoutadult supervision is illegal in moststates and Canadian provinces,and can be very hazardous. Forexample, infants and smallchildren left in a vehicle on a hotday can die from heatstroke. Andchildren left alone with the key inthe ignition can accidentally setthe vehicle in motion, possiblyinjuring themselves or others.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Protecting Children

General Guidelines for UsingChild Seats

Additional Safety Precautions

Keep vehicle keys out of the reachof children.

Lock all doors and the hatch whenyour vehicle is not in use.Do not leave children alone in your

vehicle.

29

Page 34: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

To provide proper protection, a childseat should meet threerequirements:

The child seat shouldmeet Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard 213 (FMVSS 213)or Canadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard 213 (CMVSS 213). Lookfor the manufacturer’s statementof compliance on the box and seat.

Children up to about oneyear old should be restrained in arear-facing, reclining child seat. Onlya rear-facing seat provides theproper support to protect an infant’shead, neck, and back. See page

for additional information onprotecting infants.

A child who is toolarge for a rear-facing child seat, andwho can sit up without support,should be restrained in a forward-facing child seat. See page foradditional information on protectingsmall children.34

38

Selecting a Child Seat

The child seat should meet safetystandards.

The child seat should be of theproper type and size to fit the child.

Infants: Small Children:2.

1.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Protecting Children

30

Page 35: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

CONTINUED

Due to variations in the design ofchild seats, vehicle seats, and seatbelts, all child seats will not fit allvehicle seating positions.

However, Honda is confident thatone or more child seat models can fitand be properly installed in allrecommended seating positions inyour vehicle.

Before purchasing a child seat, werecommend that parents test thechild seat in the specific vehicleseating position (or positions) wherethey intend to use the seat. If apreviously purchased child seat doesnot fit, you may need to buy adifferent one that will fit.

Your vehicle has lower anchorsinstalled for use with LATCH(Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren) - compatible child seats.For more information, see page .48

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety

The child seat should fit thevehicle seating position (orpositions) where it will be used.

3.

31

Page 36: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

If a small child must ride in thefront, follow the instructionsprovided in this section.

This page briefly summarizesHonda’s recommendations on whereto place rear-facing and forward-facing child seats in your vehicle.

The passenger’s front airbaginflates with enough force to killor seriously injure an infant in arear-facing child seat.

A small child in a forward-facingchild seat is also at risk. If thevehicle seat is too far forward,or the child’s head is thrownforward during a collision, aninflating front airbag can kill orseriously injure the child.

Never in the front seat, dueto the front airbag hazard.

Not recommended,due to the front airbag hazard. If asmall child must ride in front,move the vehicle seat to the rear-most position and secure aforward-facing child seat with theseat belt (see page ).

Recommended positions.Properly secure a rear-facing childseat (see page ).

Recommendedpositions. Properly secure aforward-facing child seat (seepage ).

39

35

39

Placing a Child Seat Front Passenger’s SeatInfants:

Small children:

Back SeatsInfants:

Small children:

Airbags Pose SeriousRisks to Children

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety32

Page 37: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

After selecting a proper child seat,and a good position to install the seat,there are three main steps ininstalling the seat:

Make sure the child is properlystrapped in the child seataccording to the child seat maker’sinstructions. A child who is notproperly secured in a child seatcan be thrown out of the seat in acrash and be seriously injured.

To provide security during normaldriving maneuvers as well as duringa collision, we recommend thatparents secure a child seat as firmlyas possible.

When you are not using a child seat,either remove it and store it in a safeplace, or make sure it is properlysecured. An unsecured child seat canbe thrown around the vehicle duringa crash or sudden stop and injuresomeone.

However, a child seat does not needto be ‘‘rock solid.’’ In some vehiclesor seating positions, it may bedifficult to install a child seat so thatit does not move at all. Some side-to-side or back-and-forth movement canbe expected and should not reducethe child seat’s effectiveness.

If the child seat is not secure, tryinstalling it in a different seatingposition, or use a different style ofchild seat that can be firmly securedin the desired seating position.

All child seats aredesigned to be secured to thevehicle with the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt. Some child seatscan be secured to the vehicle’sLATCH anchorage system instead.A child whose seat is not properlysecured to the vehicle can beendangered in a crash. See pages

, and for instructions onhow to properly secure child seatsin this vehicle.

After installing a childseat, push and pull the seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is secure.

483935

Installing a Child Seat Secure the child in the child seat.

Storing a Child Seat

Properly secure the child seat tothe vehicle.

Make sure the child seat is firmlysecured.

1.

2.

3.

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety 33

Page 38: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

In this vehicle, a rear-facing childseat can be placed in any seatingposition in the back, but not in thefront seat.

If the passenger’sfront airbag inflates, it can hit theback of the child seat with enoughforce to kill or seriously injure aninfant. If an infant must be closelywatched, we recommend thatanother adult sit in the back seatwith the baby.

If placedfacing forward, an infant could bevery seriously injured during afrontal collision.

Only a rear-facing child seat providesproper support for a baby’s head,neck, and back.

We recommend that an infant berestrained in a rear-facing child seatuntil the infant is at least one yearold, reaches the seat maker’s weightor height limit, and is able to sit upwithout support.

Two types of seats may be used: aseat designed exclusively for infants,or a convertible seat used in the rear-facing, reclining mode.

Protecting Infants

Child Seat Type

Rear-Facing Child Seat Placement

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front seat.

Do not put a rear-facing child seat ina forward-facing position.

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety34

Placing a rear-facing child seatin the front seat can result inserious injury or death if thepassenger’s front airbag inflates.

Always place a rear-facing childseat in the back seat, not thefront.

Page 39: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

CONTINUED

The lap/shoulder belts in the backseats have a locking mechanism thatmust be activated to secure a childseat.

The following pages provideinstructions and tips on how tosecure a rear-facing child seat withthis type of seat belt.

With the child seat in the desiredback seating position, route thebelt through the child seataccording to the seat maker’sinstructions, then insert the latchplate into the buckle.

To activate the lockable retractor,slowly pull the shoulder part of thebelt all the way out until it stops,then let the belt feed back into theretractor (you might hear aclicking noise as the belt retracts).

After the belt has retracted, tug onit. If the belt is locked, you will notbe able to pull it out. If you can pullthe belt out, it is not locked andyou will need to repeat these steps.

If you have a child seat designed toattach to the vehicle’s LATCHanchorage system, follow theinstructions on page .48

1. 2.

3.

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety

Rear-Facing Child Seat Installation

35

Page 40: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

After confirming that the belt islocked, grab the shoulder part ofthe belt near the buckle and pullup to remove any slack from thelap part of the belt. Remember, ifthe lap part of the belt is not tight,the child seat will not be secure.To remove slack, it may help toput weight on the child seat, orpush on the back of the seat, whilepulling up on the belt.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers. If the child seat is notsecure, unlatch the belt, allow it toretract fully, then repeat thesesteps.

To deactivate the lockingmechanism and remove a child seat,unlatch the buckle, unroute the seatbelt, and let the belt fully retract.

5.4.

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety36

Page 41: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

For proper protection, an infant mustride in a reclined, or semi-reclinedposition. To determine the properreclining angle, check with the baby’sdoctor or follow the seat maker’srecommendations.

To achieve the desired recliningangle, it may help to put a rolled uptowel under the toe of the child seat,as shown.

When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent thedriver or a front-seat passenger frommoving the seat as far back asrecommended (see page ). Or itmay prevent them from locking theseat-back in the desired uprightposition (see page ).

In either case, we recommend thatyou place the child seat directlybehind the front passenger seat,move the front seat as far forward asneeded, and leave it unoccupied. Oryou may wish to get a smaller childseat that allows you to safely carry afront passenger.

13

15

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety

Rear-Facing Child Seat InstallationTips

37

Page 42: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Of the different seats available, werecommend those that have a five-point harness system as shown.

We also recommend that a smallchild stay in the child seat as long aspossible, until the child reaches theweight or height limit for the seat.

In this vehicle, the best place toinstall a forward-facing child seat isin one of the seating positions in theback seat.

If the vehicle seat istoo far forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating front airbag can strike thechild with enough force to causevery serious or fatal injuries. If asmall child must be closely watched,we recommend that another adult sitin the back seat with the child.

A child at least one year old who cansit up without support, and who fitswithin the child seat maker’s weightand height limits, should berestrained in a forward-facing,upright child seat.

Protecting Small Children

Child Seat Type

Child Seat Placement

Placing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag canbe hazardous.

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety38

Page 43: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

With the child seat in the desiredseating position, route the beltthrough the child seat accordingto the seat maker’s instructions,then insert the latch plate into thebuckle.

The lap/shoulder belts in the backand front passenger seating positionshave a locking mechanism that mustbe activated to secure a child seat.

The following pages provideinstructions on how to secure aforward-facing child seat with thistype of seat belt.

If it is necessary to put a forward-facing child seat in the front, movethe vehicle seat as far to the rear aspossible, be sure the child seat isfirmly secured to the vehicle, andthat the child is properly strapped inthe seat.

If you have a child seat designed toattach to the vehicle’s LATCHanchorage system, follow theinstructions on page .48

1.

CONTINUED

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety

Child Seat Installation

39

Improperly placing a forward-facing child seat in the frontseat can result in serious injuryor death if the front airbagsinflate.

If you must place a forward-facing child seat in front, movethe vehicle seat as far back aspossible and properly restrainthe child.

Page 44: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

To activate the lockable retractor,slowly pull the shoulder part of thebelt all the way out until it stops,then let the belt feed back into theretractor (you might hear aclicking noise as the belt retracts).

After confirming that the belt islocked, grab the shoulder part ofthe belt near the buckle and pullup to remove any slack from thelap part of the belt. Remember, ifthe lap part of the belt is not tight,the child seat will not be secure. Itmay help to put weight on thechild seat, or push on the back ofthe seat, while pulling up on thebelt.

After the belt has retracted, tug onit. If the belt is locked, you will notbe able to pull it out. If you can pullthe belt out, it is not locked andyou will need to repeat these steps.

2.

3.

4.

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety40

Page 45: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

To deactivate the lockingmechanism in order to remove achild seat, unlatch the buckle,unroute the seat belt, and let the beltfully retract.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers. If the child seat is notsecure, unlatch the belt, allow it toretract fully, then repeat thesesteps.

5.

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety 41

Page 46: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

When a child reaches therecommended weight or height limitfor a forward-facing child seat, thechild should sit in the back seat on abooster and wear a lap/shoulder belt.

We recommend that the child use abooster seat until the child is tallenough to use the seat belt without abooster.

To determine if a lap/shoulder beltproperly fits a child, have the childsit in the rear seat, all the way backagainst the seat, and put on the seatbelt. Follow the instructions on page

. Then check how the belt fits.

The following pages giveinstructions on how to check properseat belt fit, what kind of boosterseat to use if one is needed, andimportant precautions for a childwho must sit in the front seat.

17

Protecting Larger Children Checking Seat Belt Fit

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety42

Allowing a larger child to sitimproperly in the front seat canresult in injury or death if thepassenger’s front airbag inflates.

If a larger child must sit in front,make sure the child moves theseat as far back as possible,uses a booster seat if needed,and wears the seat belt properly.

Page 47: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Whichever style you select, followthe booster seat maker’s instructions.

If the shoulder part of the belt restsover the child’s collarbone andagainst the center of the chest, andthe lap belt rests over the child’shipbones and touches the tops oftheir thighs as shown, the child isprobably big enough to wear the seatbelt.

However, if the shoulder belttouches or crosses the child’s neck,or if the lap belt crosses the child’sstomach, the child needs to use abooster seat.

This could result in serious neck andinternal injuries during a crash.

If they do, they couldbe very seriously injured in a crash.

Devices intended to improveoccupant comfort or reposition theshoulder part of a seat belt, severelycompromise the protective capabilityof the seat belt and increase thechance of serious injury in a crash.

This could causevery serious injuries during a crash.It also increases the chance that thechild will slide under the belt in acrash and be injured.

If a child needs a booster seat, werecommend choosing a high or low-back style that allows the child to bedirectly secured with the lap/shoulder belt.

CONTINUED

Using a Booster SeatDo not let a child wear a seat beltacross the neck or over the stomach.

Two children should never use thesame seat belt.

Do not put any accessories on a seatbelt.

Do not let a child put the shoulderpart of a seat belt behind the back orunder the arm.

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety 43

Page 48: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

The back seat is the safest place fora child of any age or size.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenages 12 and under be properlyrestrained in the back seat.

In addition, the passenger’s frontairbag poses serious risks to children.If the seat is too far forward, or thechild’s head is thrown forwardduring a collision, or the child isunrestrained or out of position, aninflating front airbag can kill orseriously injure the child.

Of course, children vary widely. Andwhile age may be one indicator ofwhen a child can safely ride in thefront, there are other importantfactors you should consider.

If a child who uses a booster mustride in front, move the vehicle seatas far to the rear as possible, and besure the child is wearing the seatbelt properly.

A child may continue using a boosterseat until the tops of the ears areeven with the top of the seat-back. Achild of this height should be tallenough to use the lap/shoulder beltwithout a booster.

Even then, the child may still need touse a booster seat. Note that somestates now require children to useboosters until they reach a certainage and/or weight. Be sure to checkcurrent laws in the state or stateswhere you intend to drive. On models with side airbags, the

side airbag also poses risks. If anypart of a larger child’s body is in thepath of a deploying airbag, the childcould receive possibly seriousinjuries.

When Can a Larger Child Sit in Front

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety44

Page 49: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

If you decide that a child can safelyride up front, be sure to:

Carefully read the owner’s manualand make sure you understand allseat belt instructions and all safetyinformation.

Move the vehicle seat to the rear-most position.

Have the child sit up straight, backagainst the seat, and feet on ornear the floor.

Check that the child’s seat belt isproperly positioned and secured.

Physically, a child must be largeenough for the lap/shoulder belt toproperly fit over the hips, chest, andshoulder (see pages and ). Ifthe seat belt does not fit properly,the child should not sit in the front.

To safely ride in front, a child mustbe able to follow the rules, includingsitting properly and wearing the seatbelt properly throughout a ride.

On models with side airbags,remind the child not to leantoward the door because of theside airbag.

Supervise the child. Even maturechildren sometimes need to bereminded to fasten the seat beltsor sit properly.

17 42

Physical Size

Maturity

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety 45

Page 50: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Since a tether can provide additionalsecurity, we recommend using atether whenever one is required oravailable. (Tethers are required inCanada.)

Remove the head restraint whereyou want to place the child seat.

Your vehicle has two tetheranchorage points on the ceiling nearthe hatch opening for securing atether-style child seat to the vehicle.

The tether anchorage points arelocated under plastic covers. Selectthe anchorage point you want to use,and slide the cover to open it. You can remove the head restraint

by pressing the release button.

Using Child Seats with Tethers

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety46

COVERS TETHER ANCHORAGE POINT

Page 51: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Make sure the removed headrestraints are secured in the cargoarea. Reinstall the head restraintswhen the child seat is removed.

Attach the attaching clip to thetether anchorage point as shown inthe illustration, then tighten thestrap according to the child seatmaker’s instructions. Make sure thestrap is not twisted.

Your vehicle is equipped withLATCH (Lower Anchors andTethers for Children) at the rearseats. The lower anchors are locatedbetween the seat-back and seatbottom and are to be used only witha child seat designed for use withLATCH.The exact location of each loweranchorage is marked with a smallbutton above the lower anchoragepoint. CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safety

Protecting Children

Using LATCH

47

LOWER ANCHORS

MARKS

Page 52: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

To install a LATCH-compatible childseat:

Remove the plastic cover bypulling it forward.

Make sure there are no foreignobjects around the anchors.Foreign objects could get in theway of a secure connectionbetween the child seat and theanchors.

Put the child seat in the rear leftor right vehicle seat and attach thechild seat to the lower anchorsaccording to the child seat maker’sinstructions.

Follow the child seat maker’sinstructions for any additionaladvice on adjusting or tighteningthe fit.1.

2.

3. 4.

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety48

Flexible typeRigid type

Page 53: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Remove the head restraint (seepage ).

Make sure the removed headrestraints are secured in the cargoarea. Reinstall the head restraintswhen the child seat is removed.

Attach the attaching clip to thetether anchor fitting and tightenthe strap according to the childseat maker’s instructions. Makesure the strap is not twisted.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers.

This symbol on rear or forwardfacing child seats or boostercushions indicates the presence ofLATCH compatible hardware.

5. 6.

7.

94 Canadian model only

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety

Lower Universal AnchorageSystem Symbol

49

Page 54: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

To fasten the belt, insert the latchplate into the buckle, then tug on thebelt to make sure the buckle islatched.

To unlock the belt, push the redPRESS button on the buckle.Guide the belt across your body tothe door pillar. After exiting thevehicle, be sure the belt is out of theway and will not get closed in thedoor.

All seat belts have an emergencylocking retractor. In normal driving,the retractor lets you move freely inyour seat while it keeps sometension on the belt. During a collisionor sudden stop, the retractorautomatically locks the belt to helprestrain your body.

The seat belt system alsoincludes a light on the

instrument panel to remind you andyour passengers to fasten your belts.If the driver’s seat belt is notfastened before the ignition is turnedON (II), the light will come on and abeeper will also sound. The beeperwill stop after a few seconds, but thelight will stay on until the driver’sseat belt is fastened.

The lap/shoulder belt goes overyour shoulder, across your chest,and across your hips.

Your seat belt system includes lap/shoulder belts in all four seatingpositions. The front seat belts arealso equipped with automatic seatbelt tensioners.

Seat Belt System Components Lap/Shoulder Belt

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Driver and Passenger Safety50

Page 55: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

The seat belts in all seating positionsexcept the driver’s have an additionallocking mechanism that must beactivated to secure a child seat. (Seepages and for instructions onhow to secure child seats with thistype of seat belt.)

If the shoulder part of the belt ispulled all the way out, the lockingmechanism will activate. The beltwill retract, but it will not allow thepassenger to move freely.

To deactivate the lockingmechanism, unlatch the buckle andlet the seat belt fully retract. Torefasten the belt, pull it out only asfar as needed.

See page for instructions on howto wear the lap/shoulder beltproperly.

35 39

17

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Driver and Passenger Safety 51

Page 56: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

For added protection, the front seatbelts are equipped with automaticseat belt tensioners. When activated,the tensioners immediately tightenthe belts to help hold the driver anda front passenger in place.

The tensioners are designed toactivate primarily in frontal collisions.The tensioners are independent ofthe airbag system, so they can beactivated during a collision thatmight not cause the airbags todeploy. In this case, the airbagswould not be needed but theadditional seat belt tension can behelpful.

The tensioners will be activated in acollision severe enough to cause thefront airbags to inflate.

When the tensioners are activated,the seat belts will remain tight untilthey are unbuckled in the normalway.

The SRS indicator light willcome on if there is a

problem with your automatic seatbelt tensioners (see page ).57

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Driver and Passenger Safety

Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners

52

Page 57: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

If a seat belt is worn during a crash,it must be replaced by the dealer. Abelt that has been worn during acrash may not provide the same levelof protection in a subsequent crash.The dealer should also inspect theanchors for damage and replacethem if needed.

Automatic seat belt tensioners thatdeployed during a crash must bereplaced.

For information on how to clean yourseat belts, see page .

For safety, you should check thecondition of your seat belts regularly.

Pull each belt out fully and look forfrays, cuts, burns, and wear. Checkthat the latches work smoothly andthat the lap/shoulder belts retracteasily. Any belt not in good conditionor not working properly will notprovide good protection and shouldbe replaced as soon as possible.

Honda provides a lifetime warrantyon seat belts. Honda will repair orreplace any seat belt component thatfails to function properly duringnormal use. Please see your

booklet fordetails.

271

HondaWarranty Information

Seat Belt Maintenance

U.S. Models

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Driver and Passenger Safety 53

Not checking or maintainingseat belts can result in seriousinjury or death if the seat beltsdo not work properly whenneeded.

Check your seat belts regularlyand have any problemcorrected as soon as possible.

Page 58: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Your Supplemental Restraint System(SRS) includes:

An indicator light on theinstrument panel that alerts you toa possible problem with thesystem (see page ).

Emergency backup power in caseyour vehicle’s electrical system isdisconnected in a crash.

Two front airbags. The driver’sairbag is stored in the center ofthe steering wheel; the frontpassenger’s airbag is stored in thedashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRSAIRBAG.’’

Automatic seat belt tensioners(see page ).

Sensors that can detect amoderate to severe frontalcollision.

A sophisticated electronic systemthat continually monitors andrecords information about thesensors, the control unit, theairbag activators, and driver andpassenger seat belt use when theignition is ON (II).

If you ever have a moderate tosevere frontal collision, the sensorswill detect the vehicle’s rapiddeceleration If the rate ofdeceleration is high enough, thecontrol unit will instantly inflate thefront airbags and activate theautomatic seat belt tensioners.

Your vehicle is equipped with dual-stage, dual-threshold airbags to helpreduce the chance of airbag-causedinjuries.

52

57

SRS Components How Your Front Airbags Work

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Driver and Passenger Safety54

Page 59: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

The total time for inflation anddeflation is approximately one-tenthof a second, so fast that mostoccupants are not aware that theairbags deployed until they see themlying in their laps.

During a frontal crash, your seatbelts help restrain your lower bodyand torso. Your airbag provides acushion to help restrain and protectyour head and chest.

After inflating, the front airbagsimmediately deflate, so they won’tinterfere with the driver’s visibility,or the ability to steer or operateother controls.

After a crash, you may see whatlooks like smoke. This is actuallypowder from the airbag’s surface.Although the powder is not harmful,people with respiratory problemsmay experience some temporarydiscomfort. If this occurs, get out ofthe vehicle as soon as it is safe to doso.

For additional information on howyour airbags work, ask your dealerfor a copy of the booklet titled

For additional information on howyour airbags work, see the booklettitled

that came with yourowner’s manual.

Since both airbags use the samesensors, both airbags normallyinflate at the same time. However, itis possible for only one airbag toinflate.

This can occur when the severity ofa collision is at the margin, orthreshold, that determines whetheror not the airbags will deploy. Insuch cases, the seat belt will providesufficient protection, and thesupplemental protection offered bythe airbag would be minimal.

SRS:What You Need to Know About Airbags.

SRS: What You Need to KnowAbout Airbags

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Driver and Passenger Safety 55

Page 60: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

If you ever have a moderate tosevere side impact, the sensors willdetect rapid deceleration and signalthe control unit to instantly inflateeither the driver’s or the passenger’sside airbag.

Only one airbag will deploy during aside impact. If the impact is on thepassenger’s side, the passenger’sside airbag will deploy even if thereis no passenger.

To get the best protection from theside airbags, front seat occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

Your vehicle is equipped with sideairbags for the driver and a frontseat passenger. The airbags arestored in the outer edges of the frontseat-backs, and both are marked‘‘SIDE AIRBAG.’’

Optional on EX model

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Driver and Passenger Safety

How Your Side Airbags Work

56

Page 61: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

If the light comes on at any othertime, or does not come on at all, youshould have the system checked byyour dealer. For example:

If the SRS indicator light does notcome on after you turn the ignitionswitch to ON (II).

If the light stays on after theengine starts.

If the light comes on or flashes onand off while you drive.

The SRS indicator lightalerts you to a potential

problem with your front airbags andautomatic seat belt tensioners.

On models with side airbags, thislight will also alert you to a potentialproblem with your side airbags orpassenger’s side airbag automaticcutoff system (see page ).

When you turn the ignition ON (II),this indicator will light briefly thengo out. This tells you that the systemis working properly.

If you see any of these indications,your front or side airbags may notdeploy, your passenger’s side airbagautomatic cutoff system may notwork properly, or your seat belttensioners may not work when youneed them. See your Honda dealeras soon as possible.

58

How the SRS Indicator LightWorks

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Driver and Passenger Safety 57

Ignoring the SRS indicator lightcan result in serious injury ordeath if the airbags, cutoffsystem, or tensioners do notwork properly.

Have your vehicle checked by adealer as soon as possible ifthe SRS light alerts you to apotential problem.

Page 62: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

A front seat passenger should notuse a cushion or other object as abackrest. It may prevent the cutoffsystem from working properly.

When you turn the ignition switch toON (II), the indicator should lightbriefly and go out (see page ). If itdoesn’t light, stays on, or comes onwhile driving without a passenger inthe front seat, have the systemchecked.

If a small-statured adult leanssideways, or larger adult slouchesand leans sideways into thedeployment path of the side airbag,the system may also shut off the sideairbag.

If the side airbag cutoff indicatorlight comes on, you should have thepassenger sit upright. Once thepassenger is out of the deploymentpath of the side airbag, the systemwill turn the airbag back on and thelight will go out.

It does not mean there is a problemwith your side airbags. It means thatthe side airbag cutoff system hasactivated to prevent the side airbagfrom deploying.

To reduce the risk of injury from aninflating side airbag, your vehicle hasan automatic cutoff system for thepassenger’s side airbag.

Although Honda does not encouragechildren to ride in the front, thissystem is designed to shut off theside airbag if a child leans sidewaysand the child’s head is in the sideairbag deployment path.

This light alerts you thatthe passenger’s side airbag

has been automatically shut off.67

Only on models equipped with sideairbags

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Driver and Passenger Safety

How the Side Airbag CutoffIndicator Light Works

58

Page 63: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Together, airbags andseat belts provide the bestprotection.

Tampering could causethe airbags to deploy, possiblycausing very serious injury.

See page for further informationand precautions relating to yourairbags.

If rain or spilled watersoaks into a seat-back, it canprevent the side airbag systemfrom working properly.

Improperlyreplacing or covering front seat-back covers can prevent your sideairbags from inflating during acollision.

Anyairbag that has deployed must bereplaced along with the controlunit, automatic seat belttensioners, and other related parts.Do not try to remove or replaceany airbag by yourself. This mustbe done by a Honda dealer or aknowledgeable body shop.

Your front and side airbag systems(if equipped) are virtuallymaintenance-free, and there are noparts you can safely service.However, you must have yourvehicle serviced if:

Take your vehicle toan authorized Honda dealer assoon as possible. If you ignore thisindication, the airbags might notinflate when you need them.

166

Airbag Service Additional Safety PrecautionsDo not attempt to deactivate yourairbags.

Do not tamper with airbagcomponents or wiring for anyreason.

Do not expose the front seat-backsto water.

Do not cover or replace front seat-back covers without consulting aHonda dealer.

Your airbags ever inflate.

The SRS indicator light alerts youto a problem.

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Driver and Passenger Safety 59

Page 64: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Your vehicle’s exhaust containscarbon monoxide gas. You shouldhave no problem with carbonmonoxide entering the vehicle innormal driving if you maintain yourvehicle properly.

High levels of carbon monoxide cancollect rapidly in enclosed areas,such as a garage. Do not run theengine with the garage door closed.Even with the door open, run theengine only long enough to move thevehicle out of the garage.

Have the exhaust system inspectedfor leaks whenever:

The vehicle is raised for an oilchange.You notice a change in the soundof the exhaust.The vehicle was in an accidentthat may have damaged the under-side.

If you must sit in your parked vehicle,even in an unconfined area, with theengine running, adjust the heatingand cooling system as follows:

Select the Fresh Air mode.Select the mode.Turn the fan on high speed.Set the temperature control to acomfortable setting.

With the tailgate/hatch open, airflow can pull exhaust gas into yourvehicle’s interior and create ahazardous condition. If you mustdrive with the tailgate/hatch open,open all the windows and set theheating and cooling system as shownbelow.

1.2.3.4.

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

Driver and Passenger Safety60

Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.Breathing it can causeunconsciousness and even killyou.

Avoid any enclosed areas oractivities that expose you tocarbon monoxide.

Page 65: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

These labels are in the locationsshown. They warn you of potentialhazards that could cause seriousinjury. Read these labels carefully.

If a label comes off or becomes hardto read, contact your Honda dealerfor a replacement.

CONTINUED

U.S. models only

U.S. models

Canadian models

U.S. models only

Safety Labels

Driver and Passenger Safety 61

SUN VISOR

DASHBOARD

Page 66: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

On models without side airbags

On models with side airbags

Safety Labels

Driver and Passenger Safety62

HOOD

RADIATOR CAP

Page 67: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

This section gives information aboutthe controls and displays thatcontribute to the daily operation ofyour Honda. All the essentialcontrols are within easy reach.

...........................Control Locations . 64...............................Indicator Lights . 65

.............................................Gauges . 72...............................Speedometer . 72

.................................Tachometer . 72..............Odometer/Trip Meter . 73

..................................Fuel Gauge . 73...................Temperature Gauge . 74

Controls Near the Steering.......................................Wheel . 75

...................................Headlights . 76............Daytime Running Lights . 77

....Instrument Panel Brightness . 77................................Turn Signals . 77

.....................Windshield Wipers . 78..................Windshield Washers . 79

Rear Window Wiper and.....................................Washer . 80

..........................Hazard Warning . 81.............Rear Window Defogger . 81

......Steering Wheel Adjustment . 82...............................Keys and Locks . 83

..............................................Keys . 83....................Immobilizer System . 84

............................Ignition Switch . 85......................Power Door Locks . 87

..................................Rear Doors . 88............................................Hatch . 89

........................................Tailgate . 90....................................Glove Box . 91

.................................................Seats . 92.............Front Seat Adjustments . 92

Driver’s Seat Height..............................Adjustment . 93

................Driver’s Seat Armrest . 93..........................Head Restraints . 94........................Rear Seat Access . 95

.......Rear Seat-back Adjustment . 96..........Reclining the Front Seats . 97

...............Folding the Rear Seats . 99........Removing the Rear Seats . 101

............................Power Windows . 103...............................Rear Windows . 105

...........................................Mirrors . 106..Adjusting the Power Mirrors . 106

..........................................Skylight . 107.........................Beverage Holders . 110

...............................Parking Brake . 111

...............................Ceiling Pocket . 112.......................................Coin Tray . 112

............Accessory Power Sockets . 113...............................Interior Lights . 114..............................Ceiling Light . 114

...................................Spotlights . 114......................Cargo Area Light . 115

................Ignition Switch Light . 115

Instruments and Controls

Instruments and Controls 63

Page 68: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Control Locations

Instruments and Controls64

POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MIRROR CONTROLS AUDIO SYSTEM

PARKING BRAKE

A/T model is shown.

HOOD RELEASEHANDLE

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES

HEATING/COOLINGCONTROLS

(P.87)

(P.103)

(P.160)

(P.118)

(P.126, 137)(P.106)

(P.111)

Page 69: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.

Indicator Lights

Instruments and Controls 65

IMMOBILIZERSYSTEMINDICATOR(P.68)

MAINTENANCEREQUIRED INDICATOR(P.70)

(P.67)

DOOR-OPENINDICATOR(P.70)

CRUISE CONTROLINDICATOR(P.69)

SIDE AIRBAG CUTOFFINDICATOR(P.67)

LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR

PARKING BRAKE ANDBRAKE SYSTEMINDICATOR

CHARGING SYSTEMINDICATOR

(P.66, 290)

(P.66, 291)

(P.69)LOW FUEL INDICATORHIGH BEAM INDICATORSEAT BELT

REMINDER LIGHT

(P.67)

TAILGATE AND HATCHOPEN INDICATOR(P.70)

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINTSYSTEM INDICATOR

(P.69)MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP

ANTI-LOCK BRAKESYSTEM INDICATOR(P.68)

(P.66, 292)

(P.66, 294)

Page 70: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

See page .

The instrument panel has manyindicators to give you importantinformation about your vehicle.

This light has two functions:

This indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch ON (II). Itis a reminder to check the parkingbrake. Driving with the parkingbrake not fully released candamage the brakes and tires.

If the indicator remains lit afteryou have fully released theparking brake while the engine isrunning, or if it comes on whiledriving, it can indicate a problemin the brake system. For completeinformation, see page .

The engine can be severely damagedif this light flashes or stays on whenthe engine is running. For completeinformation, see page .

If this light comes on when theengine is running, the battery is notbeing charged. For completeinformation, see page .

2.

1.

292

290

291

294

Indicator Lights

Instruments and Controls

Malfunction IndicatorLamp

Parking Brake andBrake SystemIndicator

Low Oil PressureIndicator

Charging SystemIndicator

66

U.S. Canada

Page 71: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

This indicator lights when you turnthe ignition switch ON (II). If itcomes on at any other time, itindicates that the passenger’s sideairbag has automatically shut off.For complete information, see page

.

This indicator lights when you turnthe ignition switch ON (II). If itcomes on at any other time, itindicates a potential problem withyour front airbags or automatic seatbelt tensioners. On models equippedwith side airbags, this light will alsoalert you to a potential problem withyour side airbags or passenger’s sideairbag automatic cutoff system. Forcomplete information, see page .

This indicator lights when you turnthe ignition switch ON (II). It is areminder to you and your passengersto protect yourselves by fasteningthe seat belts. A beeper also soundsif you have not fastened your seatbelt.

If you do not fasten your seat belt,the beeper will stop after a fewseconds but the light stays on untilyou do. Both the light and the beeperstay off if you fasten your seat beltbefore turning on the ignition.

58

57

Only on models equipped with sideairbags

Indicator Lights

Instruments and Controls

Supplemental RestraintSystem Indicator

Side Airbag CutoffIndicator

Seat Belt Reminder Light

67

Page 72: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

This indicator comes on for a fewseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch ON (II). It will then go off ifyou have inserted a properly-codedignition key. If it is not a properly-coded key, the indicator will blinkand the engine will not start (seepage ).

This indicator also blinks severaltimes when you turn the ignitionswitch from ON (II) to ACCESSORY(I) or LOCK (0).

The left or right turn signal lightblinks when you signal a lane changeor turn. If the light does not blink orblinks rapidly, it usually means oneof the turn signal bulbs is burned out(see page ). Replace the bulb assoon as possible, since other driverscannot see that you are signaling.

When you turn on the HazardWarning switch, both turn signallights blink. All turn signals on theoutside of the vehicle should flash.

This light normally comes on for afew seconds when you turn theignition switch ON (II), and whenthe ignition switch is turned toSTART (III). If this light comes on atany other time, there is a problem inthe ABS. If this happens, take thevehicle to your dealer to have itchecked. With the light on, yourvehicle still has normal brakingability but no anti-lock. For completeinformation, see page .188

84 259

Only on models equipped with ABS (seepage )186

Immobilizer SystemIndicator

Turn Signal and Hazard WarningIndicators

Anti-lock BrakeSystem (ABS)Indicator

Indicator Lights

Instruments and Controls68

Page 73: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Canadian models only Canadian models only

On EX model

This indicator lights when you turnthe ignition switch to ON (II) withthe headlight switch off and theparking brake set. It should go off ifyou turn on the headlights or releasethe parking brake. If it comes on atany other time, it means there is aproblem with the DRL. There mayalso be a problem with the highbeam headlights.

This light comes on with the highbeam headlights. See page forinformation on the headlightcontrols.

On Canadian models, this indicatorcomes on with reduced brightnesswhen the Daytime Running Lights(DRL) are on (see page ).

This light comes on as a reminderthat you must refuel soon.

This light comes on when thewasher fluid level is low. Add washerfluid when you see this light come on(see page ).

This lights when you set the cruisecontrol. See page for informationon operating the cruise control.

77

76

153

230

‘‘Daytime RunningLights’’ Indicator

High Beam Indicator

Cruise Control Indicator

Low Fuel Indicator

Washer Level Indicator

Indicator Lights

Instruments and Controls 69

Page 74: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Between 8,000 miles (12,800 km)and 10,000 miles (16,000 km), thisindicator will light for two secondswhen you first turn the ignitionswitch to ON (II), and then flash forten seconds.

If you exceed 10,000 miles (16,000km) without having the scheduledmaintenance performed, thisindicator will remain on as a constantreminder.

This light comes on if any door is notclosed tightly.

For the first 8,000 miles (12,800 km)after the Maintenance RequiredIndicator is reset, it will come on fortwo seconds when you turn theignition switch to ON (II).

Refer to the Maintenance Schedulesfor Normal and Severe DrivingConditions on pages .

This indicator reminds you that it istime to take your vehicle in forscheduled maintenance.

This light comes on if the tailgate orthe hatch is not closed tightly.

212 216

Indicator Lights

Maintenance RequiredIndicator

Door-open Indicator

Tailgate and Hatch OpenIndicator

Instruments and Controls70

Page 75: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Your dealer will reset this indicatorafter completing the scheduledmaintenance. If this maintenance isdone by someone other than yourHonda dealer, reset the indicator asfollows.

Turn off the engine.

Press and hold the select/resetbutton in the instrument panel,then turn the ignition switch ON(II).

Hold the button until the indicatorresets (approximately tenseconds).

1.

2.

3.

Indicator Lights

Instruments and Controls 71

Page 76: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

U.S. Models

Canadian Models

This shows your speed in miles perhour (mph). The smaller innernumbers are the speed in kilometersper hour (km/h).

This shows your speed in kilometersper hour (km/h). The smaller innernumbers are the speed in miles perhour (mph).

The tachometer shows the enginespeed in revolutions per minute(rpm). To protect the engine fromdamage, never drive with thetachometer needle in the red zone.

Gauges

Instruments and Controls

Speedometer

Tachometer

72

TACHOMETER SPEEDOMETER FUEL GAUGE

TEMPERATURE GAUGE

SELECT/RESET BUTTONODOMETER/TRIP METER

Page 77: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

CONTINUED

The odometer shows the total dis-tance your vehicle has been driven.It measures miles in U.S. models andkilometers in Canadian models.It is illegal under U.S. federal law andCanadian provincial regulations todisconnect, reset, or alter theodometer with the intent to changethe number of miles or kilometersindicated.

The trip meter shows the number ofmiles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)driven since you last reset it. Thereare two trip meters: Trip A and TripB. Switch between these displaysand the odometer by pressing theSelect/Reset button repeatedly.Each trip meter works independently,so you can keep track of twodifferent distances.

To reset a trip meter, display it, andthen press and hold the Select/Resetbutton until the number resets to‘‘0.0’’.

This shows how much fuel you have.It is most accurate when the vehicleis on level ground. It may showslightly more or less than the actualamount when you are driving oncurvy or hilly roads.

The needle returns to the bottomafter you turn off the ignition. Thegauge shows the fuel level readingimmediately after you turn theignition switch back ON (II).

Instruments and Controls

Gauges

Odometer/Trip Meter Fuel Gauge

73

Avoid driving with an extremely lowf uel level. Running out of f uel couldcause the engine to misf ire, damagingthe catalytic converter.

Page 78: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

This shows the temperature of theengine’s coolant. During normaloperation, the pointer should risefrom the bottom white mark to aboutthe middle of the gauge. In severedriving conditions, such as very hotweather or a long period of uphilldriving, the pointer may rise to theupper white zone. If it reaches thered (Hot) mark, pull safely to theside of the road. Turn to page forinstructions and precautions onchecking the engine’s coolingsystem.

288

Gauges

Instruments and Controls

Temperature Gauge

74

Page 79: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

The two levers on the steeringcolumn contain controls for drivingfeatures you use most often. The leftlever controls the turn signals,headlights, and high beams. Theright lever controls the windshieldwashers and wipers.

To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.

The hazard warning lights switch ison the dashboard beside the shiftlever.

The control under the left air vent isfor the cruise control.

The tilt adjustment lever on theunderside of the steering columnallows you to tilt the steering wheel.

:

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

Instruments and Controls 75

WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS(P.76, 77)

(P.78, 79)

SHIFT LEVER (A/T)

HAZARD WARNINGLIGHTS

A/T model is shown.

CRUISE CONTROL

(P.179)

(P.81)

(P.153)

HORN

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER(P.81)

TILT ADJUSTMENT(P.82)

Page 80: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

To flash the high beams, pull theturn signal lever back lightly, thenrelease it. The high beams will comeon and go off. The high beams willstay on for as long as you hold thelever back, no matter what positionthe headlight switch is in.

The rotating switch on the left levercontrols the lights. Turning thisswitch to the ‘‘ ’’ position turnson the parking lights, taillights,instrument panel lights, side-markerlights, and rear license plate light.Turning the switch to the ‘‘ ’’position turns on the headlights.

If you leave the lights on, you willhear a reminder tone when you openthe driver’s door.

To change from low beams to highbeams, push the turn signal leverforward until you hear a click. Theblue high beam indicator will light(see page ). To return to lowbeams, pull the turn signal leverback.

69

Headlights

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

Instruments and Controls76

Page 81: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Canadian models onlyWith the headlight switch off, thehigh beam headlights come on withreduced brightness when you turnthe ignition switch to ON (II) andrelease the parking brake. Theyremain on until you turn the ignitionoff, even if you set the parking brake.

The headlights revert to normaloperation when you turn them onwith the switch.

Signal a turn or lane change with thislever. Push down on the lever tosignal a left turn, and up to signal aright turn. If you push it up or downall the way, the turn signal continuesto blink even when you release thelever. It shuts off automatically asyou complete the turn.

Push the knob in the speedometerrepeatedly to adjust the brightnessof the instrument panel lights. Thereare six brightness levels. A segmentdisplay shows the current brightnesslevel.

CONTINUED

Instrument Panel BrightnessDaytime Running Lights Turn Signals

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

Instruments and Controls 77

TURN SIGNAL LEVER

Page 82: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

To signal a lane change, push lightlyon the turn signal lever in the properdirection and hold it. The lever willreturn to the center position as soonas you release it.

This lever controls the windshieldwipers and washers. It has fivepositions:

MIST: mistOFF: offINT: intermittentLO: low speedHI: high speed

To select a position, push the leverup or down.

In intermittent, the wipers operateevery few seconds. In low speed andhigh speed, the wipers run continu-ously.

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

Instruments and Controls

Windshield Wipers

78

Page 83: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

To operate the wipers in mist mode,push the control lever up from theOFF position. The wipers run at highspeed until you release the lever.This gives you a quick way to clearthe windshield.

To clean the windshield, pull back onthe wiper control lever. The washersspray until you release the lever.

The wipers run at low speed whileyou’re pulling the lever, thencomplete one more sweep of thewindshield after you release it.

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

Instruments and Controls

Windshield Washers

79

Page 84: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

The rotating switch on the rightlever controls the rear window wiperand washer.

The rear window washer uses thesame fluid reservoir as the wind-shield washer.

To activate the rear windshield wiper,rotate the switch to ‘‘ON’’. The wiperoperates every seven seconds aftercompleting two sweeps. When youturn the wiper switch to the ‘‘OFF’’position or turn off the ignitionswitch, the wiper will return to itsparked position.

To use the wiper and washer, rotateand hold the switch one position upfrom ‘‘ON’’. The wiper opreateswhile you are holding the switch,then completes two more sweepsafter you release it. To use thewasher only, rotate and hold theswitch one position down from‘‘OFF’’.

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

Rear Window Wiper and Washer

Instruments and Controls80

Page 85: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

The rear window defogger will clearfog, frost, and thin ice from thewindow. Push the defogger button toturn it on and off. The light in thebutton lights to show the defogger ison.

Make sure the rear window is clearand you have good visibility beforestarting to drive.

The defogger wires on the inside ofthe rear window can be accidentallydamaged. When cleaning the glass,always wipe side to side.

Push the button next to the shiftlever to turn on the hazard warninglights (four-way flashers). Thiscauses all four outside turn signalsand both indicators in the instrumentpanel to flash. Use the hazardwarning lights if you need to park ina dangerous area near heavy traffic,or if your vehicle is disabled.

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

Instruments and Controls

Hazard Warning Rear Window Defogger

81

Page 86: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Push the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in that position.

Make sure you have securelylocked the steering wheel in placeby trying to move it up and down.

To adjust the steering wheel upwardor downward:

Make any steering wheel adjustmentbefore you start driving.

Push the lever under the left sideof the steering column all the waydown.

Move the steering wheel to thedesired position, making sure thewheel points toward your chest,not toward your face. Make sureyou can see the instrument panelgauges and the indicator lights.

1.

2.

3.

4.

See page for important safetyinformation about how to properlyposition the steering wheel.

20Steering Wheel Adjustment

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

Instruments and Controls82

Adjusting the steering wheelposition while driving maycause you to lose control of thevehicle and be seriously injuredin a crash.

Adjust the steering wheel onlywhen the vehicle is stopped.

Page 87: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

These keys contain electroniccircuits that are activated by theImmobilizer System. They will notwork to start the engine if thecircuits are damaged.

Protect the keys from directsunlight, high temperature, andhigh humidity.

The keys do not contain batteries.Do not try to take them apart.

Keep the keys away from liquids.If they get wet, dry themimmediately with a soft cloth.

Do not drop the keys or set heavyobjects on them.

Your vehicle comes with two masterkeys and a valet key.

When replacing keys, use onlyHonda-approved key blanks.

The valet key works only in theignition and the door locks. You cankeep the glove box and hatch lockedwhen you leave your vehicle and thevalet key at a parking facility.

You should have received a keynumber tag with your set of keys.You will need this number if youever have to get a lost key replaced.Keep the tag stored in a safe place.When replacing keys, use onlyHonda-approved key blanks.

The master key fits all the locks onyour vehicle:• Ignition• Doors• Glove Box• Hatch

Keys

Keys and Locks

Instruments and Controls 83

KEYNUMBERTAG

MASTERKEYS(Black)

VALETKEY(Gray)

Page 88: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

The Immobilizer System protectsyour vehicle from theft. A properly-coded master or valet key must beused in the ignition switch for theengine to start. If an improperly-coded key (or other device) is used,the engine’s fuel system is disabled.

When you turn the ignition switch toON (II), the Immobilizer Systemindicator should come on for a fewseconds, then go out. If the indicatorstarts to blink, it means the systemdoes not recognize the coding of thekey. Turn the ignition switch toLOCK (0), remove the key, reinsertit, and turn the switch to ON (II)again.

The system may not recognize yourkey’s coding if another immobilizerkey or other metal object is near theignition switch when you insert thekey. To make sure the systemrecognizes the key code:

Do not keep other immobilizerkeys on the same key ring.

Use a plastic or leather key fob,not metal.

Keep other keys away from yourvehicle’s key and the ignitionswitch while trying to start theengine.

If the system repeatedly does notrecognize the coding of your key,contact your Honda dealer.

The Immobilizer System indicatorwill also blink several times whenyou turn the ignition switch from ON(II) to ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0).

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it. Electricalproblems could result that may makeyour vehicle undriveable.

If you have lost your key and youcannot start the engine, contact yourHonda dealer.

Immobilizer System

Instruments and Controls

Keys and Locks

84

Page 89: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

-As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

The ignition switch is on the rightside of the steering column. It hasfour positions:• LOCK (0)• ACCESSORY (I)• ON (II)• START (III)

You can insert orremove the key only in this position.To switch from ACCESSORY toLOCK, you must push the key inslightly as you turn it. If your vehiclehas an automatic transmission, theshift lever must also be in Park. Theanti-theft lock will lock the steeringcolumn when you remove the key.

CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls

Keys and Locks

Ignition Switch LOCK (0)

85

Page 90: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

--

Use this positiononly to start the engine. The switchreturns to ON (II) when you let go ofthe key.

You will hear a reminder beeper ifyou leave the key in the ignitionswitch in the LOCK (0) orACCESSORY (I) position and openthe driver’s door. Remove the key toturn off the beeper.

The engine will not start if theImmobilizer System does notrecognize the key’s coding (see page

).

If the front wheels are turned, theanti-theft lock may sometimes makeit difficult to turn the key fromLOCK to ACCESSORY. Firmly turnthe steering wheel to the left or tothe right as you turn the key.

In this position,you can operate the audio systemand the accessory power sockets.

This is the normal keyposition when driving. All featuresand accessories on the vehicle areusable. Several of the lights on theinstrument panel come on as a testwhen you turn the ignition switchfrom ACCESSORY to ON.

84

START (III)ACCESSORY (I)

ON (II)

Keys and Locks

Instruments and Controls86

Removing the key from theignition switch while drivinglocks the steering. This cancause you to lose control.

Remove the key from theignition switch only whenparked.

Page 91: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

The front doors can be locked andunlocked from the outside with thekey.

The master door lock switch on thedriver’s door locks and unlocks all ofthe doors and the hatch. Push theswitch down to lock all of the doorsand the hatch, and up to unlock them.

To lock the front passenger’s doorwhen getting out the vehicle, pushthe lock tab down and close the door.To lock the driver’s door, remove thekey from the ignition switch, pull theoutside door handle and push thelock tab down or push the masterswitch down. Release the handle,then close the door.

Each front door has a lock tab at thetop of the door. When you pushdown the lock tab on the driver’sdoor, all doors and the hatch lock.Pulling up the lock tab on the driver’sdoor unlocks only that door. Thelock tab on the front passenger’sdoor only locks and unlocks thatdoor.

CONTINUED

Power Door Locks

Keys and Locks

Instruments and Controls 87

MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

Page 92: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

All doors and the hatch lock whenyou push down the lock tab on thedriver’s door, or lock the driver’sdoor from the outside with the key.Only the driver’s door unlocks whenyou use the key or the lock tab. Tounlock the front passenger’s door,use the master door lock switch orthe lock tab on the front passenger’sdoor.

The Element has no center pillarsbetween front and rear seats, andthe rear doors pivot at the rear.

The rear door handle is located inthe rear door edge. The rear doorcan be opened only when the frontdoor is open. Pull the handle to openthe rear door.

To close the doors when both frontand rear doors are open, close therear door first, then the front door.The front door cannot be latchedwithout first closing the rear door.Closing the rear door on the frontdoor will damage both doors.

Keys and Locks

Instruments and Controls

Rear Doors

88

Page 93: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

CONTINUED

You can lock or unlock the hatch inany of these ways:

Use your master key to lock andunlock the hatch.Turn the key clockwise to lock thehatch, and counterclockwise tounlock it.

Lock the hatch by pushing downthe lock tab on the driver’s door(see page ), or by using themaster key in the driver’s doorlock.

Lock or unlock the hatch with themaster door lock switch.

With the hatch unlocked, open it bypulling the handle and lifting up.To close the hatch, lower it, thenpress down on the back edge.

When both the hatch and tailgate areopen, the hatch cannot be latchedwithout first closing the tailgate.

87

Keys and Locks

Instruments and Controls

Hatch

89

Page 94: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

See page for information oncargo loading. Keep the hatch closedat all times while driving to avoiddamaging the hatch, and to preventexhaust gas from getting into theinterior. See

on page .

You can open the tailgate only whenthe hatch is open. To open thetailgate, slide the lock lever to theleft and swing down the tailgate. Toclose the tailgate, lift it up and pushit firmly until it latches.

Before closing the tailgate, makesure the hatch is raised. Closing thetailgate on the lowered hatch candamage the hatch and the tailgate.

See page for information oncargo loading. Keep the tailgate andthe hatch closed at all times whiledriving to avoid damaging them, andto prevent exhaust gas from gettinginto the interior. See

on page .60 60

167167

Keys and Locks

Instruments and Controls

Carbon MonoxideHazard

Tailgate

CarbonMonoxide Hazard

90

Page 95: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Open the glove box by pulling thebottom of the handle. Close it with afirm push. Lock or unlock the glovebox with the master key.

Glove Box

Keys and Locks

Instruments and Controls 91

An open glove box can causeserious injury to your passengerin a crash, even if thepassenger is wearing the seatbelt.

Always keep the glove boxclosed while driving.

Page 96: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

-See pages for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position seats and seat-backs.

13 15

Make all seat adjustments beforeyou start driving.

To change the angle of the seat-back,pull up on the lever on the outside ofthe seat bottom. Move the seat-backto the desired position and releasethe lever. Let the seat-back latch intothe new position.

To adjust the seat forward andbackward, pull up on the bar underthe seat cushion’s front edge. Movethe seat to the desired position andrelease the bar. Try to move the seatto make sure it is locked in position.

Front Seat Adjustments

Seats

Instruments and Controls92

Page 97: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

To adjust the height of the driver’sseat, turn the dial on the outside ofthe seat bottom.

The driver’s seat has an armrest onthe side of the seat-back. To use it,pivot it down.

On EX models

Driver’s Seat Height Adjustment Driver’s Seat Armrest

Seats

Instruments and Controls 93

Page 98: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

See page for important safetyinformation and a warning about how toproperly position the head restraints.

16

Your vehicle is equipped with headrestraints in all seating positions.

The head restraints help protect youand your passengers from whiplashand other injuries. They are mosteffective when you adjust them sothe back of the occupant’s head restsagainst the center of the restraint. Ataller person should adjust therestraint as high as possible.

To remove a head restraint forcleaning or repair, pull it up as far asit will go. Push the release button,then pull the restraint out of the seat-back.

The head restraints adjust for height.You need both hands to adjust therestraint. Do not attempt to adjust itwhile driving. To raise it, pull upward.To lower the restraint, push therelease button sideways, and pushthe restraint down.

Head Restraints

Seats

Instruments and Controls94

RELEASE BUTTON

Page 99: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Although your vehicle has rear doors,the rear seat passengers can get outof the vehicle from the open frontpassenger’s door. Push down on therelease lever at the base of the frontpassenger’s seat-back, and push theseat-back forward. The seat-back willtilt forward and the entire seat willmove forward to allow easier exitthrough the front door.

After you return the seat cushion tothe desired position, pull the seat-back upright until it latches. Makesure the seat is fully latched beforesitting in it.

Rear Seat Access

Seats

Instruments and Controls 95

RELEASE LEVER

Page 100: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

-See pages for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position seats and seat-backs.

13 15

Make all seat adjustments beforeyou start driving.

The seat-back angle of each rearseat can be adjusted separately.

To change the seat-back angle, pullthe strap at the inside edge of theseat cushion, and move the seat-backto the desired position, then releasethe strap. Make sure the seat-backlatches in the new position.

Rear Seat-back Adjustment

Seats

Instruments and Controls96

SEAT-BACK ADJUSTMENT STRAP

Page 101: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Remove the head restraints fromthe front seats (see page ).

You can recline the seat-backs on thefront seats to a fully flat position sothey are level with the rear seatcushions, making a large cushionedarea. To do this:

Store the head restraints in theside pockets of the cargo area.

1.94

CONTINUED

Reclining the Front Seats

Seats

Instruments and Controls 97

Page 102: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Adjust the front seats forward asfar as they will go. Pull up the seat-back angle adjustment lever andpivot the seat-back backward.Release the lever when the seat-back is level with the rear seatcushion.

Move the front seat backwarduntil it touches the rear seat.

Adjust the rear seat-back to thedesired position.

Reverse this procedure to return thefront and rear seats to the uprightposition. Make sure you install thehead restraints and the seats arelocked securely before driving.When you return the seat-back tothe upright position, hold the seat-back to keep it from going up tooquickly.

2. 3. 4.

Seats

Instruments and Controls98

SLIDE BAR

SEAT-BACK ANGLEADJUSTMENT LEVER

Page 103: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

To create more cargo space, you canfold up each rear seat to each sidewall separately.

Lower the head restraint to itslowest position.

Pull the seat-back adjustmentstrap at the inside edge of the seatcushion and push the seat-backbackward as far as it will go.

Pull the release strap on the seatsupport, and pivot the seat towardthe vehicle’s side wall.

1.

2. 3.

CONTINUED

Folding the Rear Seats

Seats

Instruments and Controls 99

SEAT-BACK ADJUSTMENT STRAP RELEASE STRAP

Page 104: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Fold down the seat support.A fastening strap is attached to theinside of the seat cushion. Whilepushing the seat up and towardthe side wall, hook the fasteningstrap to the grab rail.

Reverse this procedure to return therear seat to the upright position.When not in use, store the fasteningstrap hook in the fabric pocket onthe bottom of the seat cushion.Make sure the seat is lockedsecurely.

4. 5.

Seats

Instruments and Controls100

GRAB RAIL

FASTENING STRAP

SEAT SUPPORT

Page 105: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Both seats can be removed to givemore cargo capacity.

To remove a seat:

Pull the seat-back adjustmentstrap at the inside edge of the seatcushion and push the seat-backbackward until seat cushion andseat-back are level.

Remove the cover between theseat cushion and the side wall bypulling the tab and pulling thecover straight up.

Pull the release strap on the seatsupport to unlock the seat support.

1.

3.2.

CONTINUED

Removing the Rear Seats

Seats

Instruments and Controls 101

SEAT-BACK ADJUSTMENT STRAP

RELEASE STRAP COVER

TAB

Page 106: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Reverse this procedure to reinstallthe seat. Make sure the seat issecurely locked.

Push the lock lever forward tounlock the seat.

Hold the steel handle next to thelock lever and the holding strap atthe outside edge of the seatcushion, and remove the entireseat by pulling it up and backward.

Always remove an unsecured seatfrom the vehicle before driving. Aseat that is not locked in place couldbe thrown about and cause injury ina sudden stop or crash.

4. 5.

Seats

Instruments and Controls102

LOCK LEVER STEEL HANDLE

HANDLE STRAP

Page 107: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Your vehicle’s front windows areelectrically-powered. Turn theignition switch to ON (II) to raise orlower either window.

Each front door has a switch thatcontrols its window. To open thewindow, push the switch down andhold it. Release the switch when youwant the window to stop. Close thewindow by pulling back on theswitch and holding it.

The driver’s door armrest has amaster power window control panel.To open the passenger’s window,push down on the switch and hold ituntil the window reaches the desiredposition. To close the window, pullback on the window switch. Releasethe switch when the window gets tothe position you want.

CONTINUED

Power Windows

Instruments and Controls 103

DRIVER’S WINDOW SWITCH

MAIN SWITCH

Closing a power window onsomeone’s hands or fingers cancause serious injury.

Make sure your passengers areaway from the windows beforeclosing them.

Page 108: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

The master control panel also con-tains these extra features:

To open the driver’swindow fully, push the windowswitch firmly down, then release it.The window automatically goesdown all the way. To stop thewindow from going all the way down,pull back on the window switchbriefly.

To close the driver’s window fully,pull back the window switch firmly,then release it. The windowautomatically goes all the way up. Tostop the window from going all theway up, push down on the windowswitch briefly.

To open or close the driver’s windowpartially, push down or pull back onthe window switch lightly and hold it.The window will stop when yourelease the switch.

The light in the AUTO switch comeson when you turn the ignition switchto ON (II).

The MAIN switch controls power tothe passenger’s window. When youpush in the MAIN switch, thepassenger’s window cannot be raisedor lowered. The MAIN switch doesnot affect the driver’s window. Tocancel this feature, push on theswitch again. Keep the MAIN switchpushed in when you have children inthe vehicle so they do not injurethemselves by operating thepassenger’s window unintentionally.

AUTO

Power Windows

Instruments and Controls104

Page 109: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, or thedriver’s window fuse is removed, theAUTO function will be disabled. Thepower window system needs to bereset after reconnecting the batteryor installing the fuse. You should dothe following.

Start the engine. Push down onthe driver’s window switch untilthe window is fully open.

Pull back on the driver’s windowswitch to close the windowcompletely, then hold the switchfor a second or two more.

If the power windows do not operateproperly after resetting, have yourvehicle checked by a Honda dealer.

Auto reverse stops sensing when thewindow is almost closed. You shouldalways check that all passengers andobjects are away from the windowbefore closing it.

If the driver’s window runs into anyobstacle while it is closingautomatically, it will reversedirection, and then stop. To close thewindow, remove the obstacle, thenuse the window switch again.

To open a rear window, pull the levertowards you, then push it out until itlocks. To close the rear window pullthe lever towards you, then push itback. Make sure the window is fullyclosed and locked.

1.

2.

Auto Reverse Rear Windows

Power Windows, Rear Windows

Instruments and Controls 105

Page 110: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Push the appropriate edge of theadjustment switch to move themirror right, left, up, or down.

When you finish, move theselector switch to the center (off)position. This turns off theadjustment switch so you can’tmove a mirror out of position byaccidentally bumping the switch.

Keep the inside and outside mirrorsclean and adjusted for best visibility.Be sure to adjust the mirrors beforeyou start driving.

The inside mirror has day and nightpositions. The night position reducesglare from headlights behind you.Flip the tab on the bottom edge ofthe mirror to select the day or nightposition.

Move the selector switch to L(driver’s side) or R (passenger’sside).

Turn the ignition switch ON (II).

Adjust the outside mirrors with theadjustment switch on the driver’sdoor armrest:

3.

4.

1.

2.

On U.S. EX, and Canadian DX and EXmodels

Adjusting the Power Mirrors

Mirrors

Instruments and Controls106

TAB

SELECTOR SWITCH ADJUSTMENT SWITCH

Page 111: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Your vehicle’s skylight can beremoved (see page ). You canalso lift up the rear of the skylightfor ventilation.

To lift up the rear of the skylight,pull down the lever to unlock theskylight, then push it up until theskylight is locked in the tilt-upposition.

To close the skylight, pull down thelever to unlock the skylight, thenpush it back in place. Make sure theskylight is fully closed and locked.

108

On 4WD models only

Skylight

Instruments and Controls 107

If you try to tilt up the skylight inbelow-f reezing temperatures, or whenit is covered with snow or ice, you candamage it.

Bef ore lif ting the skylight, make surethe roof of the vehicle is dry. Rain orremaining water af ter car-washing mayget into the f rame of the skylight. Inwinter, remove the buildup of snow onthe roof .

Page 112: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

To remove the skylight:Turn off the engine, and set theparking brake. Then pull down thelever, squeeze both sides of the pivotwhile pushing up the red tab in thelever, and pull the lever assemblyaway from the ceiling.

Push up the rear of the skylight.Standing on the tailgate with thehatch down, hold both sides of theskylight and pull it toward you toremove it from the vehicle roof.

With the rear seats in their uprightposition, store the skylight, facedown in its bag in the cargo area.Secure the bag with four hooks onthe cargo area floor. Do not storeanything on top of the skylight.

Removing and Storing theSkylight

Skylight

Instruments and Controls108

The maximum weight on the tailgate is440 lbs (200 kg).

Page 113: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

To reinstall the skylight, reverse theremoval procedure, making sure theair deflector is pushed down. Whenreinstalling the lever assembly, alignboth pivots with the receptacle holes,let the pivots move out until they restin the holes securely. Make sure theskylight is fully closed and latched.

Skylight

Instruments and Controls 109

An unsecured skylight can bethrown about and cause seriousinjury in a sudden stop or crash.

Make sure to store the skylightin its bag, and secure the bag tothe hooks on the cargo areafloor.

Page 114: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Be careful when you are using thebeverage holder. A spilled liquid thatis very hot can scald you or yourpassengers. Spilled liquids can alsodamage the upholstery, seat material,and electrical components in theinterior.

The center console has threebeverage holders for the front andrear passengers.

Each rear seat has a beverage holderat the inside edge of the seat cushion.

Beverage Holders

Instruments and Controls110

Page 115: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

To apply the parking brake, pull thelever up fully. To release it, pull upslightly, push the button, and lowerthe lever. The parking brake light onthe instrument panel should go outwhen the parking brake is fullyreleased (see page ).66

Parking Brake

Instruments and Controls 111

PARKING BRAKE LEVER

Driving the vehicle with the parkingbrake applied can damage the rearbrakes and axles.

Page 116: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

To open the ceiling pocket, push onthe button. The lid will unlatch andswing open. To close it, push it untilit latches. Make sure the lid is closedwhile you are driving.

To open the coin tray, pull the liddown. To close the lid, push it up.

The back of the ceiling pocket lidhas a pen and card holder. Use theceiling pocket to store small itemsonly. Storing heavy objects willdamage the bottom net.

On EX model

Ceiling Pocket Coin Tray

Ceiling Pocket, Coin Tray

Instruments and Controls112

Page 117: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Your vehicle has one or twoaccessory power sockets, dependingon the model. All models have afront accessory power socket on thedashboard above the glove box.

To use the accessory power socket,pull up the cover.

The EX model has anotheraccessory power socket in the cargoarea on the right side.

These sockets are intended to supplypower for 12 volt DC accessoriesthat are rated 120 watts or less (10amps). To power an accessory, theignition switch must be inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II).

They will not power an automotivetype cigarette lighter element.

When both sockets are being used,the combined power rating of eachaccessory should be 120 watts or less(10 amps).

On EX models

Accessory Power Sockets

Instruments and Controls 113

Page 118: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

If you leave any door open with thekey not in the ignition switch, theceiling light will go off after threeminutes.

The ceiling light (with the switch inthe center position) comes on whenyou remove the key from the ignitionswitch. If you do not open a door, thelight fades out in about 30 seconds.

The ceiling light has a three-positionswitch. In the OFF position, the lightdoes not come on. In the centerposition, the ceiling light comes onwhen you open any door. After alldoors are closed tightly, the lightfades out in about 30 seconds. In theON position, the ceiling light stayson continuously.

The ceiling light (with the switch inthe center position) also comes onwhen you unlock the door with thekey, the lock tab on the driver’s door,or the master door lock switch. Turn on the spotlight by pushing the

lens. Push the lens again to turn itoff. You can use the spotlights at alltimes.

On EX models

Ceiling Light Spotlights

Interior Lights

Instruments and Controls114

ON

OFF

DOOR ACTIVATED

Page 119: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

The ignition switch light comes onwhen you unlock the driver’s door,and fades out about 30 seconds afteryou close the door.

The cargo area light has a three-position switch. In the OFF position,the light does not come on. In thecenter position, the light comes onwhen you open the hatch. In the ONposition, the light stays oncontinuously.

Cargo Area Light Ignition Switch Light

Interior Lights

Instruments and Controls 115

ON

OFF

IGNITION SWITCH LIGHT

HATCH ACTIVATED

Page 120: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

116

Page 121: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

.....................Heating and Cooling . 118.........What Each Control Does . 118

............How to Use the System . 121..........To Turn Everything Off . 125

................................Audio System . 126Audio System

..........(Canadian DX model) . 126....AM/FM/CD Audio System . 126

.................Operating the Radio . 126

.................Adjusting the Sound . 129..............................Digital Clock . 130

............Audio System Lighting . 132.........Operating the CD Player . 132

.....Operating the CD Changer . 134....CD Player Error Indications . 135

CD Changer Error.............................Indications . 136

...........Audio System (EX model) . 137....AM/FM/CD Audio System . 137

.................Operating the Radio . 138

.................Adjusting the Sound . 141..............................Digital Clock . 142

............Audio System Lighting . 143....................Radio Frequencies . 143

........................Radio Reception . 143.........Operating the CD Player . 145

.....Operating the CD Changer . 147....CD Player Error Indications . 148

CD Changer Error.............................Indications . 149

.......Protecting Compact Discs . 150..................Auxiliary Input Jack . 151

.......................Theft Protection . 152...............................Cruise Control . 153

Comfort and Convenience Features

Comfort and Convenience Features 117

Page 122: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Proper use of the Heating andCooling system can make theinterior dry and comfortable, andkeep the windows clear for the bestvisibility.

Turning this dial clockwise increasesthe fan’s speed, which increases airflow.

Turning this dial clockwise increasesthe temperature of the air flow.

This button controls the source ofthe air going into the system. Whenthe indicator in this button is lit, airfrom the vehicle’s interior is sentthrough the system again (Recircula-tion mode). When the indicator is off,air is brought in from outside thevehicle (Fresh Air mode).

This button turns the rear windowdefogger on and off (see page ).

Use the MODE control dial to selectthe vents the air flows from. Someair will flow from the dashboardvents in all modes.

This button turns the air condi-tioning ON and OFF. The indicatorin the button lights when the A/C ison.

81

On U.S. EX models, and Canadian DXand EX models

Comfort and Convenience Features

Heating and Cooling

What Each Control Does

Fan Control Dial

Temperature Control Dials

Air Conditioning (A/C) Button

Recirculation Button

Rear Window Defogger Button

Mode Control Dial

118

FAN CONTROLDIAL

TEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL

MODE CONTROL DIAL

RECIRCULATIONBUTTON

AIR CONDITIONINGBUTTON

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGERBUTTON

Page 123: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

In these two modes, the A/C stayson, but the indicator in the A/Cbutton stays off.

When you select or ,the system automatically switches toFresh Air mode and turns on theA/C.

Air flows from the defrostervents at the base of the windshield.

Air flow is divided betweenthe floor vents and the defrostervents at the base of the windshield.

Air flows from the floorvents.

Air flow is divided betweenthe vents in the dashboard and thefloor vents.

Air flows from the centerand side vents in the dashboard.

The system automaticallyturns on the A/C and switches toRecirculation mode. Air flows fromthe center and side vents in thedashboard.

EX models

EX models

Heating and Cooling

Comfort and Convenience Features 119

Page 124: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

The direction of air flow from thevents in the center and each side ofthe dashboard is adjustable.

To adjust the air flow from eachcenter vent, move the tab up-and-down and side-to-side.

To adjust the air flow from each sidevent, move the tab in the center ofeach vent side-to-side, and rotate thevent with the tab.

Each side vent can be opened andclosed with the tab underneath thevent.

Heating and Cooling

Vent Controls

Comfort and Convenience Features120

CENTER VENTS PASSENGER’S SIDE VENTDRIVER’S SIDE VENT

CloseOpen

CloseOpen

Page 125: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

CONTINUED

Turn the temperature control dialall the way to the left.Make sure the A/C is off.Select and Fresh Air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.

The outside air intakes for theheating and cooling system are atthe base of the windshield. Keepthese clear of leaves and otherdebris.

It is best to leave the system in FreshAir mode under almost all conditions.Keeping the system in Recirculationmode, particularly with the A/C off,can cause the windows to fog up.Switch to Recirculation mode whenyou are driving through smoky ordusty conditions, then switch back toFresh Air mode when the conditionclears.

This section covers how to set up thesystem controls for ventilation,heating, cooling, dehumidifying, anddefrosting.

The engine must be running for theheater and air conditioning togenerate hot and cold air. The heateruses engine coolant to warm the air.If the engine is cold, it will be severalminutes before you feel warm aircoming from the system.The air conditioning does not rely onengine temperature.

The flow-through ventilation systemdraws in outside air, circulates itthrough the interior, then exhausts itthrough vents near the tailgate.

1.

2.3.

Heating and Cooling

Comfort and Convenience Features

Ventilation

How to Use the System

121

FAN CONTROLDIAL

TEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL

MODE CONTROLDIAL

RECIRCULATIONBUTTON

AIR CONDITIONINGBUTTON

Page 126: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Set the mode control dial to MAXA/C.The system automatically turns onthe A/C, selects andswitches to Recirculation mode.Make sure the temperaturecontrol dial is all the way to the left.Set the fan to the desired speed.

To cool the interior with MAX A/C:

Turn on the A/C by pressing thebutton. The light in the buttoncomes on when a fan speed isselected.Make sure the temperaturecontrol dial is all the way to the left.Select .If the outside air is humid, selectRecirculation mode. If the outsideair is dry, select Fresh Air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.

1.

2.

3.4.

5.

1.

2.

3.

EX models

Comfort and Convenience Features

Heating and Cooling

To Cool with A/C

122

FAN CONTROLDIAL

TEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL

MODE CONTROLDIAL

RECIRCULATIONBUTTON

AIR CONDITIONINGBUTTON

MAX A/CPOSITION

Page 127: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

CONTINUED

Air conditioning places an extra loadon the engine. Watch the enginecoolant temperature gauge (see page

) when driving in stop-and-gotraffic or climbing a long, steep hill.If it moves near the red zone, turnoff the A/C until the gauge readsnormally.

To warm the interior:

Start the engine.Select .Set the fan to the desired speed.Adjust the warmth of the air withthe temperature control dial.

Air conditioning, as it cools, removesmoisture from the air. When used incombination with the heater, itmakes the interior warm and dry.

Set the fan to the desired speed.Turn on the air conditioning.Select and Fresh Air mode.Adjust the temperature controldial so the mixture of heated andcooled air feels comfortable.

This setting is suitable for all drivingconditions whenever the outsidetemperature is above 32°F (0°C).

74 1.2.3.4.

1.2.3.4.

Heating and Cooling

Comfort and Convenience Features

To Heat To Heat and Dehumidify with AirConditioning

123

Page 128: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

To remove fog from the inside of thewindows:

To remove exterior frost or ice fromthe windshield and side windowsafter the vehicle has been sitting outin cold weather:

Start the engine.Select .When you select , thesystem automatically switchesto Fresh Air mode and turns onthe A/C.Set the fan and temperaturecontrols to maximum.

To rapidly remove exterior frost orice from the windshield (on very colddays), first select the Recirculationmode. Once the windshield is clear,select the Fresh Air mode to avoidfogging the windows.

These settings direct all the air flowto the defroster vents at the base ofthe windshield and the side windowdefroster vents. The air flow will getwarmer and clear the windows fasteras the engine warms up.

For safety, make sure you have aclear view through all the windowsbefore driving away.

Set the fan to the desired speed.Select .When you select , thesystem automatically switches toFresh Air mode and turns on theA/C (the indicator in the A/Cbutton does not come on).Adjust the temperature controldial so the air flow from thedefroster vents feels warm.Turn on the rear window defoggerto help clear the rear window.When you switch to another modefrom , the A/C stays on.Press the A/C button to turn it off.

1.2.

3.

1.2.

3.

4.

Heating and Cooling

Comfort and Convenience Features

To Defog and Defrost

124

Page 129: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

To shut off the system temporarily,turn the fan speed and temperaturecontrol dials all the way to the left.

No air flow can cause the windows tofog up. It is recommended that youkeep the fan on at all times so staleair and moisture do not build up inthe interior and cause fogging.

To Turn Everything Off

Heating and Cooling

Comfort and Convenience Features 125

Page 130: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to is displayed.To change bands, press the AM/FMbutton. On the FM band, ST will bedisplayed if the station is broadcast-ing in stereo. Stereo reproduction onAM is not available.

The ignition switch must be inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) tooperate the audio system. Turn thesystem on by pushing the PWR/VOL knob or the AM/FM button.Adjust the volume by turning thesame knob.

Your Honda’s audio system providesclear reception on both AM and FMbands, while the preset buttons allowyou to easily select your favoritestations.

On Canadian DX models

Comfort and Convenience Features

Audio System

Operating the Radio

AM/FM/CD Player Audio System

126

SEEK BAR

SCAN BUTTON

TUNE KNOB

SCAN INDICATOR

PRESET BUTTONS

AM/FM BUTTON

PWR/VOL KNOB AUTOSELECTBUTTON

STEREO INDICATOR

Page 131: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

The preset frequencies will be lost ifyour vehicle’s battery goes dead, isdisconnected, or the radio fuse isremoved.

Once a station’s frequency is stored,simply press and release the properpreset button to tune to it.

Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store a totalof six stations on AM and twelveon FM.

Pick the preset button you wantfor that station. Press the buttonand hold it until you hear a beep.

Use the TUNE, SEEK, or SCANfunction to tune the radio to adesired station.

Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwo frequencies with each presetbutton.

To store a frequency:You can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, AUTOSELECT, and the preset buttons.

Use the TUNE knob totune the radio to a desired frequency.Turn the TUNE knob to the right totune to a higher frequency, or to theleft to tune to a lower frequency.Release the knob when the displayreaches the desired frequency.

The SEEK functionsearches the band for a station witha strong signal. To activate it, pressthe SEEK bar on either the or

side, then release it.Depending on which side you press,the system scans upward or down-ward from the current frequency. Itstops when it finds a station with astrong signal.

The SCAN functionsamples all the stations with strongsignals on the selected band. Toactivate it, press the SCAN button,then release it. When the system isin the SCAN mode, SCN shows inthe display. The system will scan upthe band for a station with a strongsignal. When it finds one, it will stopand play that station for about fiveseconds. If you do nothing, thesystem will then scan for the nextstrong station and play that for fiveseconds. When it plays a station thatyou want to continue listening to,press the SCAN button again.

You can store thefrequencies of your favorite radiostations in the six preset buttons.Each button will store one frequencyon the AM band, and twofrequencies on the FM band.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features

TUNE

SEEK

SCAN

Preset

127

Page 132: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

- If you aretraveling far from home and can nolonger receive the stations youpreset, you can use the Auto Selectfeature to find stations in the localarea.

To activate Auto Select, press theA. SEL button. A. SEL will flash inthe display, and the system will gointo scan mode for several seconds.It automatically scans both bands,looking for stations with strongsignals. It stores the frequencies ofsix AM stations and twelve FMstations in the preset buttons. Youcan then use the preset buttons toselect those stations.

If you are in a remote area, AutoSelect may not find six strong AMstations or twelve strong FM stations.If this happens, you will see a ‘‘0’’displayed when you press any presetbutton that does not have a stationstored.

If you do not like the stations AutoSelect has stored, you can storeother frequencies in the presetbuttons. Use the TUNE, SEEK, orSCAN function to find the desiredfrequencies, then store them in theselected preset buttons as describedpreviously.

Auto Select does not erase thefrequencies that you preset pre-viously. When you return home, turnoff Auto Select by pressing theA. SEL button. The preset buttonswill then select the frequencies youoriginally set.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Audio System

AUTO SELECT

128

SEEK BAR

SCAN BUTTON

A.SEL BUTTON TUNE KNOB

AUTO SELECT INDICATOR

Page 133: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Bass, Treble, Balance, and Fader areeach adjustable. You select which ofthese you want to adjust by pressingthe TUNE knob. The mode changesfrom BAS to TRE to FAd to BAL,and then back to the selected audiomode, each time you press theTUNE knob. Each mode is shown inthe display as it changes.

These twomodes adjust the strength of thesound coming from each speaker.BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength,while FAD adjusts the front-to-backstrength.

Select BAL or FAd by pressing theTUNE knob. Adjust the Balance orFader to your liking by turning theTUNE knob. The displayed numbershows you the current setting. Whenthe adjustment level reaches thecenter, you will see ‘‘ ’’.

Use these modes toadjust the tone to your liking. SelectTRE or BAS by pressing the TUNEknob. Adjust the desired mode byturning the TUNE knob. Thedisplayed number shows you thecurrent setting. When theadjustment level reaches the center,you will see ‘‘ ’’.

The system will automatically returnthe display to the selected audiomode about five seconds after youstop adjusting a mode with theTUNE knob.

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features

Adjusting the Sound

Balance/Fader

Treble/Bass

129

Adjustment Level

Page 134: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

The display of your audio systemusually shows the time when theignition switch is in ACCESSORY (I)or ON (II). It shows the operationmode of the radio or CD player whenyou operate them, and goes back tothe time display after five seconds.

If an error occurs while operatingthe CD player or optional CDchanger, the display will keepshowing the error code and will notswitch to the time display until theerror is corrected (see pages and

).148

149

Comfort and Convenience Features

Audio System

Digital Clock

130

R BUTTONH BUTTON

M BUTTON

CLOCK BUTTONTIME DISPLAY

Page 135: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

You can use the R (Preset 6) buttonto quickly set the time to the nearesthour. Press the R button whilepressing the CLOCK button. If thedisplayed time is before the halfhour, pressing R sets the clock backto the previous hour. If the displayedtime is after the half hour, pressingR sets the clock forward to thebeginning of the next hour.

For example:1:06 would RESET to 1:00.1:52 would RESET to 2:00.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, the timesetting will be lost. To set the timeagain, follow the setting procedure.

To set the hour, press the H (Preset4) button while pressing the CLOCK(SCAN/RPT) button. Press and holdthe H button until the hour advancesto the desired time.

To set the minute, press the M(Preset 5) button while pressing theCLOCK (SCAN/RPT) button. Pressand hold the M button until theminute numbers advance to thedesired time.

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features 131

Page 136: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

For information, see page .

You can use the instrument panelbrightness control knob to adjust theillumination of the audio system (seepage ). The audio systemilluminates when the parking lightsare on, even if the radio is turned off.

You operate the CD player with thesame controls used for the radio.

With the ignition switch inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II), insertthe disc into the CD slot. Push thedisc in halfway, the drive will pull itin the rest of the way and begin toplay. The number of the track that isplaying is shown in the display.

You can also play 3-inch (8-cm) discswithout using an adapter ring. Playonly standard round discs. Odd-shaped CDs may jam in the drive orcause other problems.

For best results when using CD-Rdiscs, use only high quality discslabeled for audio use. Whenrecording a CD-R, the recordingmust be closed in order for the discto be used by CD players. CD-RWdiscs will not work in this unit.

77

143

Comfort and Convenience Features

Audio System

Radio Frequencies and Reception

Audio System Lighting

Operating the CD Player

132

EJECT BUTTONCD SLOTCD BUTTON

PWR/VOL KNOB SEEK/SKIP BAR A.SEL/RDM BUTTON

RAMDOM INDICATOR

REPEAT INDICATOR

Page 137: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

When the system reaches the end ofthe disc, it will return to the begin-ning and play the disc again.

You can switch to the radio while aCD is playing by pressing the AM/FM button. Press the CD button toreturn to playing the CD. The CDwill begin playing where it left off.

If you turn the system off while a CDis playing, either with the PWR/VOLknob or by turning off the ignition,the disc will stay in the drive. Whenyou turn the system back on, the CDwill begin playing where it left off.

Press the eject button to remove thedisc from the drive.

If you eject the disc, but do notremove it from the slot, the systemwill automatically reload the discafter 15 seconds and put the CDplayer in pause mode. To beginplaying the disc, press the CD button.

You can use the SEEK/SKIP barwhile a disc is playing to selectpassages and change tracks.

To move rapidly within a track, pressand hold the SEEK/SKIP bar. Pressthe side to move forward. Youwill see CUE in the display. Press the

side to move backward. Youwill see REW displayed. Release thebar when the system reaches thepoint you want.

Each time you press and release theside of the SEEK/SKIP bar,

the system skips forward to thebeginning of the next track. Pressand release the side to skipbackward to the beginning of thecurrent track. Press it again to skipto the beginning of the previoustrack.

To activate the Repeatfeature, press and release the RPTbutton. You will see RPT in thedisplay. The system continuouslyreplays the current track. Press theRPT button again to turn it off.

This feature,when activated, plays the tracks onthe CD in random order, rather thanin the order they are recorded on theCD. To activate Random Play, pressand release the A. SEL/RDM button.You will see RDM in the display. Thesystem will then select and playtracks randomly. This continuesuntil you deactivate Random Play bypressing A. SEL/RDM again.

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features

REPEAT

RANDOM PLAY

133

Page 138: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

-+

A Compact Disc changer is availablefor your vehicle. It holds up to sixdiscs, providing several hours ofcontinuous entertainment. Youoperate this CD changer with thesame controls used for the in-dashCD player.

Load the desired CDs in themagazine and load the magazine inthe changer according to theinstructions that came with the unit.Play only standard round discs. Odd-shaped CDs may jam in the drive orcause other problems.

For best results when using CD-Rdiscs, use only high quality discslabeled for audio use. Whenrecording a CD-R, the recordingmust be closed in order for the discto be used by CD players. CD-RWdiscs will not work in this unit.

To select the CD changer, press theCD button. The disc and tracknumbers will be displayed.

To select a different disc, use thePreset 5 (DISC ) or Preset 6(DISC ) button. Press the Preset 6button to select the next disc in themagazine. Press the Preset 5 buttonto select the previous disc. If youselect an empty slot in the magazine,the changer will, after finding thatslot empty, try to load the CD in thenext slot. This continues until it findsa CD to load and play.

If you load a CD in the in-dash playerwhile the changer is playing a CD,the system will stop the changer andbegin playing the in-dash CD. Toselect the changer again, press theCD button. Play will begin where itleft off. Use the CD button to switchbetween the player and the changer.

If you eject the in-dash CD while it isplaying, the system will automaticallyswitch to the CD changer and beginplay where it left off. If there are noCDs in the changer, the display willflash. You will have to select anothermode (AM or FM) with the button.

When you switch back to CD mode,the system selects the same unit (in-dash or changer) that was playingwhen you switched out of CD mode.

To use the SKIP, REPEAT, andRANDOM functions, refer to the in-dash player operating instructions.

For information on how to handleand protect compact discs, see page

.150

Operating the CD Changer(Optional)

Protecting Compact Discs

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features134

Page 139: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

If you see an error indication in thedisplay while operating the CDplayer, find the cause in the chart tothe right. If you cannot clear theerror indication, take the vehicle toyour Honda dealer.

SolutionCauseIndication

Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.Check if the disc is inserted correctly in the CDplayer.Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.Check the disc for damage or deformation.If the CD cannot be pulled out or the errorindication does not disappear after the disc isejected, see your Honda dealer.Do not try to force the disc out of the player.Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.

FOCUS Error

Mechanical Error

High Temperature

CD Player Error Indications

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features 135

Page 140: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

If you see an error indication in thedisplay while operating the CDchanger, find the cause in the chartto the right. If you cannot clear theerror indication, take the vehicle toyour Honda dealer.

Cause SolutionIndication

FOCUS Error

No CD in the CDMagazine

Mechanical Error

High Temperature

No CD Magazine in theCD Changer

Press the magazine eject button and pull outthe magazine, check for error indication. Insertthe magazine again. If the code does notdisappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,consult your Honda dealer.Insert CD.

Press the magazine eject button and pull outthe magazine, check for error indication. Insertthe magazine again. If the code does notdisappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,consult your Honda dealer.Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.Insert CD magazine.

CD Changer Error Indications

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features136

Page 141: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Your Honda’s audio system providesclear reception on both AM and FMbands, while the preset buttons allowyou to easily select your favoritestations.

The anti-theft feature will disable thesystem if it is disconnected from thevehicle’s battery. To get the systemworking again, you must enter acode number (see page ).152

On EX models

Audio System

AM/FM/CD Player Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features 137

Page 142: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

The ignition switch must be inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) tooperate the audio system. Turn thesystem on by pushing the PWR/VOL knob or the AM/FM button.Adjust the volume by turning thesame knob.

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to is displayed.To change bands, press the AM orFM button. On the FM band, ST willbe displayed if the station is broad-casting in stereo. Stereoreproduction on AM is not available.

You can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, AUTOSELECT, and the preset buttons.

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features

Operating the Radio

138

SEEK BUTTONS

SCAN BUTTON PRESET BUTTONS TUNE KNOB

PWR/VOL KNOB

AM BUTTONFM BUTTON

STEREO INDICATOR

Page 143: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

CONTINUED

Use the TUNE, SEEK, or SCANfunction to tune the radio to adesired station.

Pick the preset button you wantfor that station. Press the buttonand hold it until you hear a beep.

Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store a totalof six stations on AM and twelveon FM.

Once a station’s frequency is stored,simply press and release the properpreset button to tune to it.

The preset frequencies will be lost ifyour vehicle’s battery goes dead, isdisconnected, or the radio fuse isremoved.

Use the TUNE knob totune the radio to a desired frequency.Turn the TUNE knob to the right totune to a higher frequency, or to theleft to tune to a lower frequency.Stop turning the knob when the dis-play reaches the desired frequency.

The SEEK functionsearches the band for a station witha strong signal. To activate it, presseither SEEK button ( or ),then release it. Depending on whichSEEK button you press, the systemscans upward or downward from thecurrent frequency. It stops when itfinds a station with a strong signal.

The SCAN functionsamples all the stations with strongsignals on the selected band. Toactivate it, press the SCAN button,then release it. When the system isin the SCAN mode, SCN shows inthe display. The system will scan upthe band for a station with a strong

signal. When it finds one, it will stopand play that station for about fiveseconds. If you do nothing, thesystem will then scan for the nextstrong station and play that for fiveseconds. When it plays a station thatyou want to continue listening to,press the SCAN button again.

You can store thefrequencies of your favorite radiostations in the six preset buttons.Each button will store one frequencyon the AM band, and twofrequencies on the FM band.

To store a frequency:

Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwo frequencies with each presetbutton.

1.

4.

3.

2.

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features

TUNE

SEEK

SCAN

Preset

139

Page 144: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

- If you aretraveling far from home and can nolonger receive the stations youpreset, you can use the Auto Selectfeature to find stations in the localarea.

To activate Auto Select, press theA. SEL button. A. SEL will flash inthe display, and the system will gointo scan mode for several seconds.It automatically scans both bands,looking for stations with strongsignals. It stores the frequencies ofsix AM stations and twelve FMstations in the preset buttons. Youcan then use the preset buttons toselect those stations.

If you are in a remote area, AutoSelect may not find six strong AMstations or twelve strong FM stations.If this happens, you will see a ‘‘0’’displayed when you press any presetbutton that does not have a stationstored.

If you do not like the stations AutoSelect has stored, you can storeother frequencies in the presetbuttons. Use the TUNE, SEEK, orSCAN function to find the desiredfrequencies, then store them in theselected preset buttons as describedpreviously.

Auto Select does not erase thefrequencies that you preset pre-viously. When you return home, turnoff Auto Select by pressing theA. SEL button. The preset buttonswill then select the frequencies youoriginally set.

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features

AUTO SELECT

140

A.SEL BUTTON

AUTO SELECT INDICATOR

Page 145: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Subwoofer, Treble, Bass, Fader, andBalance are each adjustable. Youselect which of these you want toadjust by pressing the TUNE knob.The mode changes from SUB-W toBAS to TRE to FAD to BAL, andthen back to the selected audiomode, each time you press theTUNE knob.

The system will automatically returnthe display to the selected audiomode about five seconds after youstop adjusting a mode with theTUNE knob.

Usethese modes to adjust the tone toyour liking. Select SUB-W, TRE, orBAS by pressing the TUNE knob.Adjust the desired mode by turningthe TUNE knob. The displayednumber show you the current setting.When the adjustment level reachesthe center, you will see ‘‘ ’’.

These twomodes adjust the strength of thesound coming from each speaker.BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength,while FAD adjusts the front-to-back

strength.

Select BAL or FAD by pressing theTUNE knob. Adjust the Balance orFader to your liking by turning theTUNE knob. The displayed numbershows you the current setting. Whenthe adjustment level reaches thecenter, you will see ‘‘ ’’.

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features

Adjusting the Sound

Sub-woofer/Treble/Bass

Balance/Fader

141

TUNE KNOB

Page 146: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

The audio system display shows thetime when the ignition switch is inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II).

For example:1:06 would RESET to 1:00.1:52 would RESET to 2:00.

When you are finished, press theCLOCK (TUNE) button again.

To set the clock, press and hold theCLOCK (TUNE) button until thenumbers flash. Change the hour bypressing the H button until thenumbers advance to the desired time.Change the minute by pressing theM button until the numbers advanceto the desired time.

You can use the R button to quicklyset the time to the nearest hour. Ifthe displayed time is before the halfhour, pressing R sets the clock backto the previous hour. If the displayedtime is after the half hour, pressingR sets the clock forward to the begin-ning of the next hour.

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features

Digital Clock

142

H BUTTON

CLOCKBUTTON

M BUTTON

R BUTTON

Page 147: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

CONTINUED

You can use the instrument panelbrightness control knob to adjust theillumination of the audio system (seepage ). The audio systemilluminates when the parking lightsare on, even if the radio is turned off.

Your Honda’s radio can receive thecomplete AM and FM bands.Those bands cover these frequen-cies:

AM band:530 to 1,710 kilohertzFM band:87.7 to 107.9 megahertz

Radio stations on the AM band areassigned frequencies at least tenkilohertz apart (530, 540, 550).Stations on the FM band areassigned frequencies at least 0.2megahertz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).

Stations must use these exactfrequencies. It is fairly common forstations to round-off the frequency intheir advertising, so your radio coulddisplay a frequency of 100.9 eventhough the announcer may identifythe station as ‘‘FM101.’’

How well your Honda’s radioreceives stations is dependent onmany factors, such as the distancefrom the station’s transmitter,nearby large objects, and atmos-pheric conditions.

A radio station’s signal gets weakeras you get farther away from itstransmitter. If you are listening to anAM station, you will notice the soundvolume becoming weaker, and thestation drifting in and out. If you arelistening to an FM station, you willsee the stereo indicator flickering offand on as the signal weakens.Eventually, the stereo indicator will

go off and the sound will fadecompletely as you get out of range ofthe station’s signal.

Driving very near the transmitter ofa station that is broadcasting on afrequency close to the frequency ofthe station you are listening to canalso affect your radio’s reception.You may temporarily hear bothstations, or hear only the station youare close to.

77

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features

Audio System Lighting

Radio Frequencies Radio Reception

143

Page 148: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Radio signals, especially on the FMband, are deflected by large objectssuch as buildings and hills. Yourradio then receives both the directsignal from the station’s transmitter,and the deflected signal. This causesthe sound to distort or flutter. This isa main cause of poor radio receptionin city driving.

Radio reception can be affected byatmospheric conditions such asthunderstorms, high humidity, andeven sunspots. You may be able toreceive a distant radio station oneday and not receive it the next daybecause of a change in conditions.

Electrical interference from passingvehicles and stationary sources cancause temporary reception problems.

As required by the FCC:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features144

Page 149: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

You operate the CD player with thesame controls used for the radio.

With the ignition switch inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II), insertthe disc into the CD slot. Push thedisc in halfway, the drive will pull itin the rest of the way and begin toplay. The number of the track that isplaying is shown in the display.

You can also play 3-inch (8-cm) discswithout using an adapter ring. In allcases, play only standard round discs.Odd-shaped CDs may jam in thedrive or cause other problems.

For best results when using CD-Rdiscs, use only high quality discslabeled for audio use. Whenrecording a CD-R, the recordingmust be closed in order for the discto be used by CD players. CD-RWdiscs will not work in this unit.

CONTINUED

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features

Operating the CD Player

145

PWR/VOL KNOB SKIP BUTTONSA.SEL/RDM BUTTON

CD BUTTON

CD SLOTEJECT BUTTON RANDOM INDICATOR

Page 150: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

When the system reaches the end ofthe disc, it will return to the begin-ning and play the disc again.

If you turn the system off while a CDis playing, either with the PWR/VOLknob or by turning off the ignition,the disc will stay in the drive. Whenyou turn the system back on, the CDwill begin playing where it left off.

Press the eject button to remove thedisc from the drive.

If you eject the disc, but do notremove it from the slot, the systemwill automatically reload the discafter 15 seconds and put the CDplayer in pause mode. To beginplaying the disc, press the CD button.

To activate the Repeatfeature, press and release the RPTbutton. You will see RPT in thedisplay. The system continuouslyreplays the current track. Press theRPT button again to turn it off.

This feature,when activated, plays the tracks onthe CD in random order, rather thanin the order they are recorded on theCD. To activate Random Play, pressand release the A. SEL/RDM button.You will see RDM in the display. Thesystem will then select and playtracks randomly. This continuesuntil you deactivate Random Play bypressing A. SEL/RDM again.

You can switch to the radio while aCD is playing by pressing the AM orFM button. Press the CD button toreturn to playing the CD. The CDwill begin playing where it left off.

You can use the SKIP buttons whilea disc is playing to select passagesand change tracks.

To move rapidly within a track, pressand hold an appropriate SKIP button.Press button to move forward,or the button to move backward.Release the button when the systemreaches the point you want.

Each time you press the buttonand release it, the system skipsforward to the beginning of the nexttrack. Press and release the

button to skip backward to thebeginning of the current track. Pressand release it again to skip to thebeginning of the previous track.

REPEAT

RANDOM PLAY

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features146

Page 151: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

-+

A Compact Disc changer is availablefor your vehicle. It holds up to sixdiscs, providing several hours ofcontinuous entertainment. Youoperate this CD changer with thesame controls used for the in-dashCD player.

Load the desired CDs in themagazine and load the magazine inthe changer according to theinstructions that came with the unit.Play only standard round discs. Odd-shaped CDs may jam in the drive orcause other problems.

For best results when using CD-Rdiscs, use only high quality discslabeled for audio use. Whenrecording a CD-R, the recordingmust be closed in order for the discto be used by CD players. CD-RWdiscs will not work in this unit.

To select the CD changer, press theCD button. The disc and tracknumbers will be displayed.

If you eject the in-dash CD while it isplaying, the system will automaticallyswitch to the CD changer and beginplay where it left off. If there are noCDs in the changer, the display willflash. You will have to select anothermode (AM or FM) with the button.

When you switch back to CD mode,the system selects the same unit (in-dash or changer) that was playingwhen you switched out of CD mode.

To use the SKIP, REPEAT, andRANDOM functions, refer to the in-dash player operating instructions.

To select a different disc, use thePreset 5 (DISC ) or Preset 6(DISC ) button. Press the Preset 6button to select the next disc in themagazine. Press the Preset 5 buttonto select the previous disc. If youselect an empty slot in the magazine,the changer will, after finding thatslot empty, try to load the CD in thenext slot. This continues until it findsa CD to load and play.

If you load a CD in the in-dash playerwhile the changer is playing a CD,the system will stop the changer andbegin playing the in-dash CD. Toselect the changer again, press theCD button. Play will begin where itleft off. Use the CD button to switchbetween the player and the changer.

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features

Operating the CD Changer(Optional)

147

Page 152: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

If you see an error indication in thedisplay while operating the CDplayer, find the cause in the chart tothe right. If you cannot clear theerror indication, take the vehicle toyour Honda dealer.

Indication Cause Solution

FOCUS Error

Mechanical Error

High Temperature

Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.Check if the disc is inserted correctly in the CDplayer.Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.Check the disc for damage or deformation.If the CD cannot be pulled out or the errorindication does not disappear after the disc isejected, see your Honda dealer.Do not try to force the disc out of the player.Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.

Audio System

CD Player Error Indications

Comfort and Convenience Features148

Page 153: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

If you see an error indication in thedisplay while operating the CDchanger, find the cause in the chartto the right. If you cannot clear theerror indication, take the vehicle toyour Honda dealer.

Indication Cause Solution

FOCUS Error

No CD in the CDMagazine

Mechanical Error

High Temperature

No CD Magazine in theCD Changer

Press the magazine eject button and pull outthe magazine, check for error indication. Insertthe magazine again. If the code does notdisappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,consult your Honda dealer.Insert CD.

Press the magazine eject button and pull outthe magazine, check for error indication. Insertthe magazine again. If the code does notdisappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,consult your Honda dealer.Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.Insert CD magazine.

CD Changer Error Indications

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features 149

Page 154: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Handle a CD by its edges; nevertouch either surface. Do not placestabilizer rings or labels on the CD.These, along with contaminationfrom fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tippens, can cause the CD to not playproperly, or possibly jam in the drive.

When a CD is not being played, storeit in its case to protect it from dustand other contamination. To preventwarpage, keep CDs out of directsunlight and extreme heat.

To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.Wipe across the disc from the centerto the outside edge.

A new CD may be rough on theinner and outer edges. The smallplastic pieces causing this roughnesscan flake off and fall on the re-cording surface of the disc, causingskipping or other problems. Removethese pieces by rubbing the innerand outer edges with the side of apencil or pen.

Never try to insert foreign objects inthe CD player.

Protecting Compact Discs

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features150

Page 155: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

An auxiliary input jack is located onthe dashboard next to the accessorypower socket.

Your audio system will acceptauxiliary inputs from a portablecassette player, CD changer, MP3player, etc. To use the jack, turndown the volume of the audio unitand the portable unit. Then pivot thecover up, plug in a mini-jack cablebetween the portable unit and thejack, and press the AUX button onthe audio unit.

Auxiliary Input Jack

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features 151

Page 156: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

You should have received a card thatlists your audio system’s codenumber and serial number. It is bestto store this card in a safe place athome. In addition, you should writethe audio system’s serial number inthis Owner’s Manual. If you shouldhappen to lose the card, you mustobtain the code number from yourHonda dealer. To do this, you willneed the system’s serial number.

If your vehicle’s battery is discon-nected or goes dead, or the radiofuse is removed, the audio systemwill disable itself. If this happens,you will see ‘‘CODE’’ in thefrequency display the next time youturn on the system. Use the presetbuttons to enter the five-digit code.For example if your code is ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4,5,’’ press the 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 presetbuttons. If the code is enteredcorrectly, the radio will start playing.

If you make a mistake entering thecode, do not start over or try tocorrect your mistake. Complete thefive-digit sequence, then enter thecorrect code. You have ten tries toenter the correct code. If you areunsuccessful in ten attempts, youmust then leave the system on forone hour before trying again.

You will have to store your favoritestations in the preset buttons afterthe system begins working. Youroriginal settings were lost whenpower was disconnected.

Your vehicle’s audio system willdisable itself if it is disconnectedfrom electrical power for any reason.To make it work again, the usermust enter a specific five-digit codein the preset buttons. Because thereare hundreds of numbercombinations possible from fivedigits, making the system workwithout knowing the exact code isnearly impossible.

On EX modelsTheft Protection

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features152

Page 157: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed above 25 mph (40 km/h).

Push in the Cruise Control MasterSwitch to the left of the steeringcolumn. The indicator in theswitch will light.

Cruise control allows you to maintaina set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h)without keeping your foot on theaccelerator pedal. It should be usedfor cruising on straight, openhighways. It is not recommended forconditions such as city driving,winding roads, slippery roads, heavyrain, or bad weather. You shouldhave full control of the vehicle underthose conditions.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

On EX models Using the Cruise Control

Cruise Control

Comfort and Convenience Features 153

Improper use of the cruisecontrol can lead to a crash.

Use the cruise control onlywhen traveling on openhighways in good weather.

Page 158: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

You can increase the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

When climbing a steep hill, theautomatic transmission maydownshift to hold the set speed.

Press and release the SET/DECEL button on the steeringwheel. The CRUISE CONTROLlight on the instrument panelcomes on to show the system isnow activated.

The cruise control may not hold theset speed when you are going up anddown hills. If your speed increasesgoing down a hill, use the brakes toslow down to the desired speed. Thiswill cancel the cruise control. Toresume the set speed, press theRES/ACCEL button. The CRUISECONTROL light on the instrumentpanel comes on.

Press and hold the RES/ACCELbutton. The vehicle will accelerate.When you reach the desiredcruising speed, release the button.

To increase your speed in verysmall amounts, tap the RES/ACCEL button repeatedly. Eachtime you do this, your vehicle willspeed up about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Push on the accelerator pedal.Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed and press the SET/DECELbutton.

3.

Changing the Set Speed

Comfort and Convenience Features

Cruise Control

154

RESUME/ACCEL

SET/DECEL

Page 159: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Resting your foot on the brake orclutch pedal will cause the cruisecontrol to cancel.

You can decrease the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Tap the brake or clutch pedal.

You can cancel the cruise control inany of these ways:

Push the CANCEL button on thesteering wheel.

Press the Cruise Control MasterSwitch.

Even with the cruise control turnedon, you can still use the acceleratorpedal to speed up for passing. Aftercompleting the pass, take your footoff the accelerator pedal. The vehiclewill return to the set cruising speed.

Press and hold the SET/DECELbutton. The vehicle will decelerate.Release the button when youreach the desired speed.

To slow down in very smallamounts, tap the SET/DECELbutton repeatedly. Each time youdo this, your vehicle will slowdown about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Tap the brake or clutch pedallightly with your foot. TheCRUISE CONTROL light on theinstrument panel will go out.When the vehicle slows to thedesired speed, press the SET/DECEL button. The vehicle willthen maintain the desired speed.

CONTINUED

Cancelling the Cruise Control

Cruise Control

Comfort and Convenience Features 155

CANCEL BUTTON

Page 160: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Pressing the Cruise Control MasterSwitch turns the system completelyoff and erases the previous cruisingspeed from memory. To use thesystem again, refer to

.

When you push the CANCEL button,or tap the brake or clutch pedal, theCRUISE CONTROL light on theinstrument panel will go out and thevehicle will begin to slow down. Youcan use the accelerator pedal in thenormal way.

The system remembers thepreviously-set cruising speed. Toreturn to that speed, accelerate toabove 25 mph (40 km/h), then pressthe RES/ACCEL button. TheCRUISE CONTROL light comes on,and the vehicle will accelerate to thesame cruising speed as before.

Cruise Control

Comfort and Convenience Features

Using theCruise Control

156

Page 161: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Before you begin driving your Honda,you should know what gasoline touse, and how to check the levels ofimportant fluids. You also need toknow how to properly store luggageor packages. The information in thissection will help you. If you plan toadd any accessories to your vehicle,please read the information in thissection first.

.............................Break-in Period . 158.........................................Gasoline . 158

.........Service Station Procedures . 159................Filling the Fuel Tank . 159

....................Opening the Hood . 160...............................Oil Check . 162

.........Engine Coolant Check . 163...............................Fuel Economy . 164

.....................Vehicle Condition . 164...........................Driving Habits . 164

...Accessories and Modifications . 165.............................Carrying Cargo . 167

Before Driving

Before Driving 157

Page 162: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Help assure your vehicle’s futurereliability and performance by payingextra attention to how you driveduring the first 600 miles (1,000 km).During this period:

Your Honda is designed to operateon unleaded gasoline with a pumpoctane number of 86 or higher. Useof a lower octane gasoline can causea persistent, heavy metallic rappingnoise in the engine that can lead tomechanical damage.

We recommend gasolines containingdetergent additives that help preventfuel system and engine deposits.

Using gasoline containing lead willdamage your vehicle’s emissionscontrols. This contributes to airpollution.

In Canada, some gasolines containan octane-enhancing additive calledMMT. If you use such gasolines,your emission control systemperformance may deteriorate andthe Malfunction Indicator Lamp onyour instrument panel may turn on.If this happens, contact yourauthorized Honda dealer for service.

You should follow these same re-commendations with an overhauledor exchanged engine, or when thebrakes are relined.

Do not change the oil until therecommended time or mileageinterval shown in the maintenanceschedule.

Avoid hard braking. New brakesneed to be broken-in by moderateuse for the first 200 miles (300km).

Avoid full-throttle starts and rapidacceleration.

Break-in Period, Gasoline

Before Driving

Break-in Period Gasoline

158

Page 163: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

CONTINUED

Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.You may hear a hissing sound aspressure inside the tank escapes.Place the cap in the holder on thefuel fill door.

Stop filling the tank after the fuelnozzle automatically clicks off. Donot try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank, leavesome room for the fuel to expandwith temperature changes.

Your vehicle has an on-boardrefueling vapor recovery system tohelp keep fuel vapors from goinginto the atmosphere. If the fuelnozzle keeps clicking off eventhough the tank is not full, theremay be a problem with this system.Consult your dealer.

Because the fuel fill cap is on thedriver’s side of the vehicle, parkwith that side closest to theservice station pumps.

Open the fuel fill door by pullingout the notched edge.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Filling the Fuel Tank

Service Station Procedures

Before Driving 159

FUEL FILL CAP

Gasoline is highly flammableand explosive. You can beburned or seriously injuredwhen handling fuel.

Stop the engine and keepheat, sparks, and flame away.Handle fuel only outdoors.Wipe up spills immediately.

Page 164: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Shift to Park or Neutral and setthe parking brake. Pull the hoodrelease handle located under thelower left corner of the dashboard.The hood will pop up slightly.

Screw the fuel fill cap back on,tighten it until it clicks severaltimes. If you do not properlytighten the cap, the MalfunctionIndicator Lamp may come on (seepage ).

Standing in front of the vehicle,put your fingers between the frontedge of the hood and the frontgrille. The hood latch handle isabove the ‘‘H’’ logo. Push thishandle up until it releases thehood. Lift the hood.

Push the fuel fill door closed.

1. 2.

5.

6.

292

Service Station Procedures

Before Driving

Opening the Hood

160

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE

LATCH

Page 165: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

If you can open the hood withoutlifting the hood latch handle, or thehood latch handle moves stiffly ordoes not spring back as before, themechanism should be cleaned andlubricated (see page ).

To close the hood, lift it up slightly toremove the support rod from thehole. Put the support rod back intoits holding clip. Lower the hood toabout a foot (30 cm) above thefender, then let it drop.

After closing the hood, make sure itis securely latched.

Pull the support rod out of its clipand insert the end into the hole inthe hood.

3.

237

CONTINUED

Service Station Procedures

Before Driving 161

SUPPORT ROD

CLIP

Page 166: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Check the engine oil level every timeyou fill the vehicle with fuel. Wait afew minutes after turning the engineoff before you check the oil.

Remove the dipstick (orangehandle).

Wipe the dipstick with a cleancloth or paper towel.

Insert it all the way back in its tube.2.

1.

3.

Oil Check

Service Station Procedures

Before Driving162

DIPSTICK

Page 167: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Remove the dipstick again andcheck the level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

If it is near or below the lower mark,see on page .

Look at the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Make sure it isbetween the MAX and MIN lines. Ifit is below the MIN line, see

on page forinformation on adding the propercoolant.

Refer toon page for information

on checking other items in yourHonda.

4.

219

225

212

Service Station Procedures

Before Driving

Adding Oil

AddingEngine Coolant

Owner MaintenanceChecks

Engine Coolant Check

163

UPPER MARK

LOWER MARK

MAX

MIN

RESERVE TANK

Page 168: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Always maintain your vehicle accord-ing to the maintenance schedule.This will keep it in top operatingcondition.

You can improve fuel economy bydriving moderately. Rapid acceler-ation, abrupt cornering, and hardbraking use more fuel.

The condition of your vehicle andyour driving habits are the two mostimportant things that affect the fuelmileage you get.

A cold engine uses more fuel than awarm engine. It is not necessary to‘‘warm-up’’ a cold engine by letting itidle for a long time. You can driveaway in about a minute, no matterhow cold it is outside. The enginewill warm up faster, and you getbetter fuel economy. To cut down onthe number of ‘‘cold starts,’’ try tocombine several short trips into one.

The air conditioning puts an extraload on the engine which makes ituse more fuel. Turn off the A/C tocut down on air conditioning use.Use the flow-through ventilationwhen the outside air temperature ismoderate.

Always drive in the highest gear thatallows the engine to run and acceler-ate smoothly.

In winter, the build-up of snow onyour vehicle’s underside adds weightand rolling resistance. Frequentcleaning helps your fuel mileage andreduces the chance of corrosion.

Depending on traffic conditions, tryto maintain a constant speed. Everytime you slow down and speed up,your vehicle uses extra fuel. Use thecruise control, when appropriate, toincrease fuel economy.

An important part of that mainte-nance is the

(see page ). Forexample, an underinflated tirecauses more ‘‘rolling resistance,’’which uses fuel. It also wears outfaster, so check the tire pressure atleast monthly.

219

Vehicle Condition

Driving Habits

Owner MaintenanceChecks

Fuel Economy

Before Driving164

Page 169: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Modifying your vehicle, or installingsome non-Honda accessories, canmake your vehicle unsafe. Beforeyou make any modifications or addany accessories, be sure to read thefollowing information.

When properly installed, cellularphones, alarms, two-way radios, andlow-powered audio systems shouldnot interfere with your vehicle’scomputer-controlled systems, suchas the SRS and anti-lock brakesystem.

Your dealer has Honda accessoriesthat allow you to personalize yourvehicle. These accessories havebeen designed and approved for yourvehicle, and are covered by warranty.

Non-Honda accessories are usuallydesigned for universal applications.Although aftermarket accessoriesmay fit on your vehicle, they may notmeet factory specifications, andcould adversely affect your vehicle’shandling and stability. (See‘‘Modifications’’ on page foradditional information.) If possible, have your dealer inspect

the final installation.

Have the installer contact yourHonda dealer for assistance beforeinstalling any electronic accessory.

Be sure electronic accessories donot overload electrical circuits(see page ).

Make sure the accessory does notobscure any lights, or interferewith proper vehicle operation orperformance.

Before installing any accessory:

However, if electronic accessoriesare improperly installed, or exceedyour vehicle’s electrical systemcapacity, they can interfere with theoperation of your vehicle, or evencause the airbags to deploy.

299

166

Accessories

Accessories and Modifications

Before Driving 165

Improper accessories ormodifications can affect yourvehicle’s handling, stability, andperformance, and cause acrash in which you can be hurtor killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regardingaccessories and modifications.

Page 170: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

If a side airbaginflates, a cup holder or other hardobject attached on or near thedoor could be propelled inside thevehicle and hurt someone.

Covering the outside edge of afront seat-back, with a non-Hondaseat cover for example, couldprevent the side airbag frominflating properly.

Removing parts from your vehicle,or replacing components with non-Honda (aftermarket) componentscould seriously affect your vehicle’shandling, stability, and reliability.

Some examples are:Lowering the vehicle with anaftermarket suspension kit thatsignificantly reduces groundclearance can allow theundercarriage to impact speedbumps or other raised objects,which could cause the airbags todeploy.

Raising the vehicle with anaftermarket suspension kit canaffect the handling and stability.

Aftermarket wheels, because theyare a universal design, can causeexcessive stress on suspensioncomponents.

Larger or smaller wheels and tirescan interfere with the operation ofyour vehicle’s anti-lock brakes andother systems.

Do not modify your steering wheelor any other part of yourSupplemental Restraint System.Modifications could make thesystem ineffective.

Any objectattached to or placed on the coversmarked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG,’’ in thecenter of the steering wheel andon top of the dashboard, couldinterfere with the proper operationof the airbags. Or, if the airbagsinflate, the objects could bepropelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone.

If you plan to modify your vehicle,consult with your Honda dealer.

Only on models equipped with sideairbags

Modifications

Additional Safety Precautions

Do not attach hard objects on ornear a front door.

Do not place any objects over theoutside edge of a front seat-back.

Do not attach or place objects onthe front airbag covers.

Accessories and Modifications

Before Driving166

Page 171: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Your vehicle has several convenientstorage areas so you can stow cargosafely.

The glove box, and the pockets inthe doors and seat-backs, aredesigned for small, lightweight items.The cargo area is intended for larger,heavier items. In addition, the backseats can be folded or removed toallow you to carry more cargo orlonger items.

However, carrying too much cargo,or improperly storing it, can affectyour vehicle’s handling, stability,stopping distance, and tires, andmake it unsafe. Before carrying anytype of cargo, be sure to read thefollowing pages.

Carrying Cargo

Before Driving 167

CARGO AREA SIDE POCKET

GLOVE BOXCARGO AREA

DOOR POCKETS

SEAT-BACK POCKET (EX)

CEILING POCKET (EX)

Page 172: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

×

If your vehicle will be towing atrailer, load from your trailer willbe transferred to your vehicle.Consult this manual to determinehow this reduces the availablecargo and luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle.

Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers from675 lbs (308 kg).

The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo andluggage load capacity.

For example, if there will be four 150lbs (70 kg) occupants in your vehicle,the amount of available cargo andluggage load capacity is 75 lbs (34kg).4 150 lbs (70 kg) = 600 lbs (280kg)675 lbs (308 kg) 600 lbs (280 kg) =75 lbs (34 kg)

Determine the combined weightof the driver and passengers thatwill be riding in your vehicle.(Four is the seating capacity ofyour vehicle.)

Locate the statement, ‘‘thecombined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed 675 lbs(308 kg)’’ on your vehicle’s placard(on the driver’s doorjamb).

The maximum load limit for yourvehicle is 675 lbs (308 kg). Thisfigure includes the total weight of alloccupants, cargo, accessories, andthe tongue weight if you are towing atrailer.

Following are the steps fordetermining the correct cargo andluggage load limit.

Determine the combined weightof accessories, luggage, and cargobeing loaded in the vehicle. Theweight may not safely exceed theavailable cargo and luggage loadcapacity calculated in step 4 [75lbs (34 kg) in this example].

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Load Limit

Carrying Cargo

Before Driving168

Overloading or improperloading can affect handling andstability and cause a crash inwhich you can be hurt or killed.

Follow all load limits and otherloading guidelines in thismanual.

Page 173: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

If you can carry any items on aroof rack, be sure the total weightof the rack and the items does notexceed the maximum allowableweight. Please contact your Hondadealer for further information.

If you use an accessory roof rack,the roof rack weight limit may belower. Refer to the information thatcame with your roof rack.

Distribute cargo evenly on thefloor of the cargo area, placing theheaviest items on the bottom andas far forward as possible. Tiedown items that could be thrownabout the vehicle during a crash orsudden stop.

If you carry large items thatprevent you from closing thetailgate or the hatch, exhaust gascan enter the passenger area. Toavoid the possibility of

, follow theinstructions on page .

Store or secure all items that couldbe thrown around and hurtsomeone during a crash.

Be sure items placed on the floorbehind the front seats cannot rollunder the seats and interfere withthe driver’s ability to operate thepedals, or with the properoperation of the seats.

Keep the glove box closed whiledriving. If it is open, a passengercould injure their knees during acrash or sudden stop. 60

Carrying Cargo

Before Driving

Carrying Cargo in the Cargo Areaor on a Roof Rack

carbonmonoxide poisoning

Carrying Items in the PassengerCompartment

169

Page 174: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

To secure cargo, use the four cargohooks in the cargo area floor. Thereis another hook on each side wallnear the hatch. Make sure all storeditems are secured before driving.

Carrying Cargo

Cargo Hooks

Before Driving170

HOOKS

Page 175: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

This section gives you tips onstarting the engine under variousconditions, and how to operate the5-speed manual and automatictransmissions. It also includesimportant information on parkingyour vehicle, the braking system,and facts you need if you are plan-ning to tow a trailer or drive off-highway.

........................Driving Guidelines . 172

........................Preparing to Drive . 173.......................Starting the Engine . 174

Starting in Cold Weather....................at High Altitude . 175

....5-speed Manual Transmission . 176.....Recommended Shift Points . 177

..............Engine Speed Limiter . 177

..............Automatic Transmission . 178.Shift Lever Position Indicator . 178

................Shift Lever Positions . 179..............Engine Speed Limiter . 182

....................Shift Lock Release . 183...........................................Parking . 184

.....................The Braking System . 185.............Brake Wear Indicators . 185

...............Brake System Design . 186.......................Anti-lock Brakes . 186

Important Safety.........................Reminders . 187........................ABS Indicator . 188

...............Driving in Bad Weather . 189...........................Towing a Trailer . 191

Towing Your Vehicle Behind a................................Motorhome . 198

..............Off-Highway Guidelines . 200.................General Information . 200

Important Safety............................Precautions . 201

...............................Driving Tips . 202

Driving

Driving 171

Page 176: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

These advantages come at some cost.Because your vehicle is taller andrides higher off the ground, it has ahigh center of gravity. This meansthat your vehicle can tip or roll overif you make abrupt turns. Utilityvehicles have a significantly higherrollover rate than other types ofvehicles.

Avoid sharp turns and abruptmaneuvers whenever possible.

Do not modify your vehicle in anyway that would raise the center ofgravity.

Do not carry heavy cargo on theroof.

To prevent the risk of rollover orloss of control:

Take corners at slower speedsthan you would with a passengervehicle.

Your Element has higher groundclearance than a passenger vehicledesigned only for use on pavement.Higher ground clearance has manyadvantages for off-highway driving.It allows you to travel over bumpsand unpaved roads. It also providesgood visibility so you can anticipateproblems earlier.

Your Element is equipped with aunique four-wheel drive (4WD)system. Normally, power is deliveredonly to the front wheels. When thesystem senses a loss of front-wheeltraction, it automatically transferssome power to the rear wheels. Thisgives you better traction andmobility.

While this system can provideincreased traction on slipperysurfaces, you still need to exercisethe same care when accelerating,steering, and braking that you wouldin a two-wheel drive vehicle.

See page for additional guidelinesfor driving off-highway.

Four-wheel Drive Models

200

Driving Guidelines

Driving172

Page 177: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

You should do the following checksand adjustments every day beforeyou drive your vehicle.

Make sure all windows, mirrors,and outside lights are clean andunobstructed. Remove frost, snow,or ice.

Check the adjustment of the seat(see page ).

Check the adjustment of theinside and outside mirrors (seepage ).

Check the adjustment of thesteering wheel (see page ).

Turn the ignition switch ON (II).Check the indicator lights in theinstrument panel.

Start the engine (see page ).

Check the gauges and indicatorlights in the instrument panel (seepage ).

Visually check the tires. If a tirelooks low, use a gauge to check itspressure.

Check that any items you may becarrying with you inside are storedproperly or fastened downsecurely.

Make sure the doors, the hatch,and the tailgate are securelyclosed and locked.

Fasten your seat belt. Check thatyour passengers have fastenedtheir seat belts (see page ).

Check that the hood, tailgate, andhatch are fully closed.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

12.

17

65

92

106

82

174

Driving

Preparing to Drive

173

Page 178: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

If the engine still does not start,press the accelerator pedal all theway down and hold it there whilestarting in order to clear flooding.As before, keep the ignition key inthe START (III) position for nomore than 15 seconds. Return tostep 5 if the engine does not start.If it starts, lift your foot off theaccelerator pedal so the enginedoes not race.

If the engine does not start within15 seconds, or starts but stallsright away, repeat step 4 with theaccelerator pedal pressed half-waydown. If the engine starts, releasepressure on the accelerator pedalso the engine does not race.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition key to theSTART (III) position. If the enginedoes not start right away, do nothold the key in START (III) formore than 15 seconds at a time.Pause for at least 10 secondsbefore trying again.

Apply the parking brake.

In cold weather, turn off allelectrical accessories to reducethe drain on the battery.

Make sure the shift lever is inPark. Press on the brake pedal.

Push the clutch pedal down all theway. START (III) does notfunction unless the clutch pedal ispressed.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Manual Transmission:

Automatic Transmission:

Driving

Starting the Engine

174

Page 179: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

An engine is harder to start in coldweather. The thinner air found athigh altitude above 8,000 feet(2,400 meters) adds to the problem.Use the following procedure:

Turn off all electrical accessoriesto reduce the drain on the battery.

Push the accelerator pedal half-way to the floor and hold it therewhile starting the engine. Do nothold the ignition key in START(III) for more than 15 seconds.When the engine starts, releasethe accelerator pedal gradually asthe engine speeds up and smoothsout.

If the engine fails to start in step 2,push the accelerator pedal to thefloor and hold it there while youtry to start the engine for no morethan 15 seconds. If the enginedoes not start, return to step 2.

3.

2.

1.

Starting in Cold Weather at HighAltitude (Above 8,000 feet/2,400 meters)

Starting the Engine

Driving 175

Page 180: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

The manual transmission is syn-chronized in all forward gears forsmooth operation. It has a lockout soyou cannot shift directly from Fifthto Reverse. When shifting up ordown, make sure you push the clutchpedal down all the way, shift to thenext gear, and let the pedal upgradually. When you are not shifting,do not rest your foot on the clutchpedal. This can cause your clutch towear out faster.

Come to a full stop before you shiftinto Reverse. You can damage thetransmission by trying to shift intoReverse with the vehicle moving.Push down the clutch pedal, andpause for a few seconds beforeshifting into Reverse, or shift intoone of the forward gears for amoment. This stops the gears sothey won’t ‘‘grind.’’

When slowing down, you can getextra braking from the engine byshifting to a lower gear. This extrabraking can help you maintain a safespeed and prevent your brakes fromoverheating while going down asteep hill. Before downshifting,make sure engine speed will not gointo the tachometer’s red zone in thelower gear.

5-speed Manual Transmission

Driving176

Rapid slowing or speeding-upcan cause loss of control onslippery surfaces. If you crash,you can be injured.

Use extra care when driving onslippery surfaces.

Page 181: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Drive in the highest gear that letsthe engine run and acceleratesmoothly. This will give you the bestfuel economy and effective emis-sions control. The following shiftpoints are recommended:

Shift up

1st to 2nd2nd to 3rd3rd to 4th4th to 5th

Normal acceleration

15 mph (24 km/h)25 mph (40 km/h)40 mph (64 km/h)48 mph (77 km/h)

If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce theRPM below the red zone.

Before downshifting, make sure theengine will not go into thetachometer’s red zone.

Driving

Recommended Shift Points Engine Speed Limiter

5-speed Manual Transmission

177

Page 182: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Your Honda’s transmission has fourforward speeds, and is electronicallycontrolled for smoother shifting. Italso has a ‘‘lock-up’’ torque converterfor better fuel economy. You mayfeel what seems like another shiftwhen the converter locks.

This indicator on the instrumentpanel shows which position the shiftlever is in.

The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for afew seconds when you turn theignition switch to ON (II). If itflashes while driving (in any shiftposition), it indicates a possibleproblem in the transmission. Avoidrapid acceleration and have the trans-mission checked by an authorizedHonda dealer as soon as possible.

Shift Lever Position Indicator

Driving

Automatic Transmission

178

Page 183: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

CONTINUED

The shift lever has six positions. Itmust be in Park or Neutral to startthe engine. When you are stopped inD, 2, 1, N, or R, press firmly on thebrake pedal, and keep your foot offthe accelerator pedal.

You cannot shift out of Park with thebrake pedal pressed when theignition switch is in LOCK (0) orACCESSORY (I).

This position mechani-cally locks the transmission. UsePark whenever you are turning off orstarting the engine. To shift out ofPark, you must press on the brakepedal and have your foot off theaccelerator pedal. Press the releasebutton on the side of the shift leverto move it out of park.

To shift from:P to R

R to NN to DD to 22 to 11 to 22 to DD to NN to RR to P

Do this:Press the brake pedal andpress the release button.

Press the release button.

Move the lever.

Automatic Transmission

Driving

Shift Lever Positions

Park (P)

179

SHIFT LEVER

Page 184: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Use Neutral if youneed to restart a stalled engine, or ifit is necessary to stop briefly withthe engine idling. Shift to Park posi-tion if you need to leave the vehiclefor any reason. Press on the brake pe-dal when you are moving the shiftlever from Neutral to another gear.

If you have done all of the above andstill cannot move the lever out ofPark, see Shift Lock Release on page

.

Your vehicle has a reverse lockout soyou cannot accidentally shift toReverse when the vehicle speedexceeds 5 mph (8 km/h).

You must also press the releasebutton to shift into Park. To avoidtransmission damage, come to acomplete stop before shifting intoPark. The shift lever must be in Parkbefore you can remove the key fromthe ignition switch.

To shift to Reversefrom Park, see the explanation underPark. To shift to Reverse fromNeutral, come to a complete stop andthen shift. Press the release buttonbefore shifting into Reverse fromNeutral.

If you cannot shift to Reverse whenthe vehicle is stopped, press thebrake pedal, and slowly shift toNeutral. Then press the releasebutton, and shift to Reverse.

If there is a problem in the reverselockout system, or your vehicle’sbattery is disconnected or goes dead,you cannot shift to Reverse. (Referto Shift Lock Release on page ).183

183

Neutral (N)

Reverse (R)

Automatic Transmission

Driving180

Page 185: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

- Use this position foryour normal driving. The transmis-sion automatically selects a suitablegear for your speed and acceleration.You may notice the transmissionshifting up at higher speeds whenthe engine is cold. This helps theengine warm up faster.

For faster acceleration, you can getthe transmission to automaticallydownshift by pushing the acceleratorpedal to the floor. The transmissionwill shift down one or two gears,depending on your speed. Overdrive (O/D) is on whenever you

turn the ignition ON (II). You canturn it off by pressing the O/Dswitch on the end of the shift lever.The O/D OFF indicator on theinstrument panel next to the shiftlever ‘‘D’’ position indicator will comeon.

Pressing the O/D switch again turnsthe overdrive mode back on.Overdrive can be turned on or offonly when the ignition switch is ON(II) and the shift lever is in the Dposition. Overdrive mode turns onevery time you start the engine, evenif you turned it off the last time youdrove the vehicle.

CONTINUED

Automatic Transmission

Driving

Drive (D) Overdrive (O/D) Mode

181

OVERDRIVE OFF INDICATOR

Page 186: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

The O/D OFF indicator also comeson for a few seconds when you turnthe ignition switch to ON(II).

When overdrive is off, thetransmission selects only the firstthree gears. Turn the O/D off toprovide engine braking when goingdown a steep hill. You can also avoidthe transmission from cyclingbetween third and fourth gears instop-and-go driving.

To shift to Second,press the release button on the sideof the shift lever. This position locksthe transmission in second gear. Itdoes not downshift to first gearwhen you come to a stop. Secondgives you more power when climbing,and increased engine braking whengoing down steep hills. Use secondgear when starting out on a slipperysurface or in deep snow. It will helpreduce wheelspin.

If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce theRPM below the red zone.

To shift from Second toFirst, press the release button on theside of the shift lever. With the leverin this position, the transmissionlocks in first gear. By upshifting anddownshifting through 1, 2, and D,you can operate this transmissionmuch like a manual transmissionwithout a clutch pedal.

If you shift into First when thevehicle speed is above 31 mph (50km/h), the transmission shifts intosecond gear first to avoid suddenengine braking.

Automatic Transmission

Driving

Second (2)

Engine Speed LimiterFirst (1)

182

Page 187: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

This allows you to move the shiftlever out of Park if the normalmethod of pushing on the brakepedal does not work. This procedureis also used to release the ReverseLockout.

Put a cloth on the edge of the ShiftLock Release slot cover next tothe shift lever. Use a small flat-tipped screwdriver or small metalplate (neither are included in thetool kit) to remove the cover.Carefully pry on the edge of thecover.

To release the Reverse Lockout,make sure the ignition switch is inthe ACCESSORY(I) position.

Make sure the ignition switch is inthe LOCK (0) position.

Set the Parking brake.

Insert a screwdriver in the ShiftLock Release slot.

If you need to use the Shift LockRelease, it means your vehicle isdeveloping a problem. Have thevehicle checked by your Hondadealer.

Push down on the screwdriverwhile you press the release buttonon the side of the shift lever andmove the shift lever out of Park toNeutral.

To release the Reverse Lockout,move the shift lever from Neutralto Reverse, then to Park.

Remove the screwdriver from theShift Lock Release slot, theninstall a new cover. Make sure thenotch on the cover is on the rightside. Press the brake pedal, andrestart the engine.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Shift Lock Release

Automatic Transmission

Driving 183

COVER

SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT

Page 188: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Always use the parking brake whenyou park your vehicle. The indicatoron the instrument panel shows thatthe parking brake is not fullyreleased; it does not indicate that theparking brake is firmly set. Makesure the parking brake is set firmlyor your vehicle may roll if it isparked on an incline.

If your vehicle has an automatictransmission, set the parking brakebefore you put the transmission inPark. This keeps the vehicle frommoving and putting pressure on theparking mechanism in thetransmission making it easier tomove the shift lever out of Parkwhen you want to drive away.

If the vehicle is facing uphill, turnthe front wheels away from the curb.If you have a manual transmission,put it in first gear.

If the vehicle is facing downhill, turnthe front wheels toward the curb. Ifyou have a manual transmission, putit in reverse gear.

Make sure the parking brake is fullyreleased before driving away.Driving with the parking brakepartially set can overheat or damagethe rear brakes.

Place any packages, valuables, etc.,in the cargo area or take themwith you.

Turn off the lights.

Lock the doors and the hatch withthe key.

Never park over dry leaves, tallgrass, or other flammablematerials. The three way catalyticconverter gets very hot, and couldcause these materials to catch onfire.

Make sure the skylight and thewindows are closed.

Parking Tips

Driving

Parking

184

Page 189: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

When the brake pads need replacing,you will hear a distinctive metallic‘‘screeching’’ sound when you applythe brakes. If you do not have thebrake pads replaced, they will beginscreeching all the time.

Constant application of the brakeswhen going down a long hill buildsup heat and reduces their effective-ness. Use the engine to assist thebrakes by downshifting to a lowergear and taking your foot off theaccelerator pedal.

Check your brakes after drivingthrough deep water. Apply thebrakes moderately to see if they feelnormal. If not, apply them gently andfrequently until they do. Since alonger distance is needed to stopwith wet brakes, be extra cautiousand alert in your driving.

Put your foot on the brake pedal onlywhen you intend to brake. Restingyour foot on the pedal keeps thebrakes applied lightly, causing themto build up heat. Heat build-up canreduce how well your brakes work. Italso keeps your brake lights on allthe time, confusing drivers behindyou.

Your Honda is equipped with discbrakes at all four wheels. A powerassist helps reduce the effort neededon the brake pedal. The ABS (onvehicles equipped with ABS) helpsyou retain steering control whenbraking very hard.

All four brakes have audible brakewear indicators.

Your brakes may sometimes squealor squeak when you apply themlightly. Do not confuse this with thebrake wear indicators. Theindicators make a very audible‘‘screeching.’’

Brake Wear Indicators

The Braking System

Driving 185

Page 190: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

The hydraulic system that operatesthe brakes has two separate circuits.Each circuit works diagonally acrossthe vehicle (the left-front brake isconnected with the right-rear brake,etc.). If one circuit should develop aproblem, you will still have brakingat two wheels.

When the front tires skid, you losesteering control; the vehiclecontinues straight ahead eventhough you turn the steering wheel.The ABS helps to prevent lock-upand helps you retain steering controlby pumping the brakes rapidly; muchfaster than a person can do it.

The ABS also balances the front-torear braking distribution accordingto vehicle loading.

ABS helps to prevent the wheelsfrom locking up and skidding duringhard braking, allowing you to retainsteering control.

Standard on EX modelsBrake System Design Anti-lock Brakes

The Braking System

Driving186

Front

Page 191: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

this defeats thepurpose of the ABS. Let the ABSwork for you by always keeping firm,steady pressure on the brake pedalas you steer away from the hazard.This is sometimes referred to as

You will feel a pulsation in the brakepedal when the ABS activates, andyou may hear some noise. This isnormal; it is the ABS rapidlypumping the brakes.

Activation varies with the amount oftraction your tires have. On drypavement, you will need to press onthe brake pedal very hard before youactivate the ABS. However, you mayfeel the ABS activate immediately ifyou are trying to stop on snow or ice.

it only helps with steeringcontrol during braking. You shouldalways maintain a safe followingdistance from other vehicles.

such as trying to take acorner too fast or making a suddenlane change. Always drive at a safe,prudent speed for the road andweather conditions.

Always steer moderatelywhen you are braking hard. Severeor sharp steering wheel movementcan still cause your vehicle to veerinto oncoming traffic or off the road.

on loose oruneven surfaces, such as gravel orsnow, than a vehicle without anti-lock. Slow down and allow a greaterdistance between vehicles underthose conditions.

‘‘stomp and steer.’’

CONTINUED

You should never pump thebrake pedal; ABS does not reduce the time or

distance it takes to stop thevehicle;

ABS will not prevent a skid thatresults from changing directionabruptly,

ABS cannot prevent a loss ofstability.

A vehicle with ABS may require alonger distance to stop

Important Safety Reminders

The Braking System

Driving 187

Page 192: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

The ABS is self-checking. If anythinggoes wrong, the ABS indicator onthe instrument panel comes on (seepage ). This means the anti-lockfunction of the braking system hasshut down. The brakes still work likea conventional system without anti-lock, providing normal stoppingability. You should have the dealerinspect your vehicle as soon aspossible.

If the ABS indicator and the brakesystem indicator come on together,and the parking brake is fullyreleased, the front-to-rear brakingdistribution system may also shutdown.

Test your brakes as instructed onpage . If the brakes feel normal,drive slowly and have your vehiclerepaired by your dealer as soon aspossible. Avoid sudden hard brakingwhich could cause the rear wheels tolock up and possibly lead to a loss ofcontrol.

68

294

ABS Indicator

The Braking System

Driving188

ABS INDICATOR

Page 193: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

- -Always driveslower than you would in dryweather. It takes your vehicle longerto react, even in conditions that mayseem just barely damp. Applysmooth, even pressure to all thecontrols. Abrupt steering wheelmovements or sudden, hard appli-cation of the brakes can cause loss ofcontrol in wet weather. Be extracautious for the first few miles(kilometers) of driving while youadjust to the change in drivingconditions. This is especially true insnow. A person can forget somesnow-driving techniques during thesummer months. Practice is neededto relearn those skills.

Exercise extra caution when drivingin rain after a long dry spell. Aftermonths of dry weather, the firstrains bring oil to the surface of theroadway, making it slippery.

Being able to seeclearly in all directions and beingvisible to other drivers are importantin all weather conditions. This ismore difficult in bad weather. To beseen more clearly during daylighthours, turn on your headlights.

Inspect your windshield wipers andwashers frequently. Keep the wind-shield washer reservoir full of theproper fluid. Have the windshieldwiper blades replaced if they start tostreak the windshield or leave partsunwiped. Use the defrosters and airconditioning to keep the windowsfrom fogging up on the inside (seepage ).

Rain, fog, and snow conditions re-quire a different driving techniquebecause of reduced traction andvisibility. Keep your vehicle well-maintained and exercise greatercaution when you need to drive inbad weather. The cruise controlshould not be used in these condi-tions.

124

CONTINUED

Driving Technique Visibility

Driving in Bad Weather

Driving 189

Page 194: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

- Check your tiresfrequently for wear and properpressure. Both are important inpreventing ‘‘hydroplaning’’ (loss oftraction on a wet surface). In thewinter, mount snow tires on all fourwheels for the best handling.

Watch road conditions carefully,they can change from moment tomoment. Wet leaves can be as slip-pery as ice. ‘‘Clear’’ roads can havepatches of ice. Driving conditionscan be very hazardous when theoutside temperature is near freezing.The road surface can becomecovered with areas of water puddlesmixed with areas of ice, so yourtraction can change without warning.

Be careful when downshifting. Iftraction is low, you can lock up thedrive wheels for a moment and causea skid.

Be very cautious when passing, orbeing passed by other vehicles. Thespray from large vehicles reducesyour visibility, and the wind buffetingcan cause you to lose control.

Traction

Driving in Bad Weather

Driving190

Page 195: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Your Honda has been designedprimarily to carry passengers andtheir cargo. You can use it to tow atrailer if you carefully observe theload limits, use the proper equipment,and follow the guidelines in thissection.

The weight thatthe tongue of a fully-loaded trailerputs on the hitch should beapproximately 10 percent of thetrailer weight. Too little tongueload can make the trailer unstableand cause it to sway. Too muchtongue load reduces front-tiretraction and steering control.

The totalweight of the trailer andeverything loaded in it must notexceed 1,500 lbs (680 kg). Towinga load that is too heavy canseriously affect your vehicle’shandling and performance. It canalso damage the engine anddrivetrain.

CONTINUED

Tongue Load:

Load Limits

Total Trailer Weight:

Towing a Trailer

Driving 191

Page 196: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

To achieve a proper tongue load,start by loading 60 percent of theload toward the front of the trailerand 40 percent toward the rear, thenre-adjust the load as needed.

The total weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, all cargo, thetongue load must not exceed:

The total weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, all cargo, and thetongue load must not exceed:

on the front axle

on the rear axleand

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR):

Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR):

Towing a Trailer

Driving192

4,450 lbs (2,020 kg)

2,300 lbs (1,045 kg)

2,205 lbs (1,000 kg)

Exceeding load limits orimproperly loading your vehicleand trailer can cause a crash inwhich you can be seriouslyinjured or killed.

Check the loading of yourvehicle and trailer carefullybefore starting to drive.

Page 197: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

The best way to confirm that vehicleand trailer weights are within limitsis to have them checked at a publicscale.

Using a suitable scale or a specialtongue load gauge, check the tongueload the first time you set up atowing combination (a fully-loadedvehicle and trailer), then recheck thetongue load whenever the conditionschange.

Towing can require a variety ofequipment, depending on the size ofyour trailer, how it will be used, andhow much load you are towing.

Discuss your needs with your trailersales or rental agency, and follow theguidelines in the rest of this section.Also make sure that all equipment isproperly installed and that it meetsfederal, state, province, and localregulations.

Any hitch used on your vehicle mustbe properly bolted to the underbody.

Always use safety chains. Make surethey are secured to both the trailerand hitch, and that they cross underthe tongue so they can catch thetrailer if it becomes unhitched.Leave enough slack to allow thetrailer to turn corners easily, but donot let the chains drag on the ground.

CONTINUED

Checking Loads Towing Equipment andAccessories

Hitches

Safety Chains

Towing a Trailer

Driving 193

Page 198: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Honda recommends that any trailerhaving a total weight of 1,000 lbs(450 kg) or more be equipped withits own electric or surge-type brakes.

If you choose electric brakes, besure they are electronically actuated.Do not attempt to tap into yourvehicle’s hydraulic system. Nomatter how successful it may seem,any attempt to attach trailer brakesto your vehicle’s hydraulic systemwill lower braking effectiveness andcreate a potential hazard. All states and Canadian provinces

require some type of trailer lights.Check requirements for the areaswhere you plan to tow.

If you use a converter, you can getthe connector and pins that matewith the connector in your vehiclefrom your Honda dealer.

Since lighting and wiring vary intrailer type and brand, you shouldalso have a qualified mechanic installa suitable connector between thevehicle and the trailer.

Your vehicle has a trailer lightingconnector located behind the rightside panel in the cargo area. Refer tothe drawing above for the wiringcolor code and purpose of each pin.

Trailer Brakes Trailer Lights

Towing a Trailer

Driving194

GROUND(BLACK)

BACK-UP LIGHT(GREEN/BLACK)

LEFT TURN SIGNAL(GREEN/RED)

TAILLIGHT(RED/YELLOW)

BRAKE LIGHT(WHITE/BLACK)

RIGHT TURN SIGNAL(GREEN/YELLOW)

Page 199: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Many states and Canadian provincesrequire special outside mirrors whentowing a trailer. Even if they don’t,you should install special mirrors ifyou cannot clearly see behind you, orif the trailer creates a blind spot.

Ask your trailer sales or rentalagency if any other items arerecommended or required for yourtowing situation.

When preparing to tow, and beforedriving away, be sure to check thefollowing:

The vehicle has been properlyserviced, and the tires, brakes,suspension, and cooling systemare in good operating condition.

The lights and brakes on yourvehicle and the trailer are workingproperly.

The trailer has been properlyserviced and is in good condition.

All items on and in the trailer areproperly secured and cannot shiftwhile you drive.

The hitch, safety chains, and anyother attachments are secure.

Your vehicle tires and spare areproperly inflated (see page ),and the trailer tires and spare areinflated as recommended by thetrailer maker.

All weights and loads are withinlimits (see pages and ).

If you tow frequently, follow theSevere Conditions maintenanceschedule.

192191

250

Additional Trailer Equipment Pre-Tow Checklist

Towing a Trailer

Driving 195

Page 200: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

The added weight, length, andheight of a trailer will affect yourvehicle’s handling and performance,so driving with a trailer requiressome special driving skills andtechniques.

For your safety and the safety ofothers, take time to practice drivingmaneuvers before heading for theopen road, and follow the guidelinesdiscussed below.

When climbing hills, closely watchyour temperature gauge. If it nearsthe red mark, turn the airconditioning off, reduce speed and, ifnecessary, pull to the side of theroad to let the engine cool.

Make turns more slowly and widerthan normal. The trailer tracks asmaller arc than your vehicle, and itcan hit or run over something thevehicle misses. Allow more time anddistance for braking. Do not brake orturn suddenly as this could cause thetrailer to jackknife or turn over.

If you must stop when facing uphill,use the foot brake or parking brake.Do not try to hold the vehicle inplace by pressing on the accelerator,as this can cause the automatictransmission to overheat.

Drive slower than normal in alldriving situations, and obey postedspeed limits for vehicles with trailers.If you have an automatictransmission, use the overdrive(O/D) mode when towing a traileron level roads. Turn off theoverdrive (O/D) mode when towinga trailer in hilly terrain (see page

). (See ‘‘ ’’ in thenext column for additional gearinformation.)

If the automatic transmission shiftsfrequently between 3rd and 4thgears while going up a hill, turn offthe overdrive (O/D) mode (see page

).

181

181

Driving Safely With a Trailer

Towing a Trailer

Driving

Driving on Hills

Making Turns and Braking

Towing Speeds and Gears

Driving on Hills

196

Page 201: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Follow all normal precautions whenparking, including firmly setting theparking brake and putting thetransmission in Park (automatic) orin 1st or Reverse (manual). Also,place wheel chocks at each of thetrailer’s tires.

Always drive slowly and havesomeone guide you when backing up.Grip the of the steeringwheel; then turn the wheel to the leftto get the trailer to move to the left,and turn the wheel right to move thetrailer to the right.

Crosswinds and air turbulencecaused by passing trucks can disruptyour steering and cause trailerswaying. When being passed by alarge vehicle, keep a constant speedand steer straight ahead. Do not tryto make quick steering or brakingcorrections.

When driving down hills, reduceyour speed and shift down to 3rdgear on the manual transmission,and turn off the overdrive (O/D)mode on the automatic transmission.Do not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes, andremember, it will take longer to slowdown and stop when towing a trailer.

bottom

Parking

Backing Up

Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting

Driving

Towing a Trailer

197

Page 202: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

When purchasing a tow bar, makesure you select a reputablemanufacturer and installer. Followthe manufacturer’s attachmentinstructions carefully.

Your Element can be towed behind amotorhome at legal highway speedsup to 65 mph(100 km/h). Do notexceed 65 mph (100km/h).Otherwise, severe transmissiondamage will occur. To avoid damageto the 4WD system, it must be towedwith all four wheels on the ground(flat towing).

After attaching the tow bar to yourmotorhome, do the following toprepare your Element for ‘‘flattowing’’:

When preparing to tow yourElement, make sure thetransmission is filled to the correctlevel (see page ). Do notoverfill.

When preparing to tow your Element,make sure the transmission is full offluid (see page ). Maintainingthe correct level is very important.Do not overfill. Do the following

Follow the procedure exactly.Otherwise, severe automatictransmission damage will occur.

Release the parking brake.

Shift the transmission to Neutral.

Leave the key in the ignitionswitch and the ignition switch inACCESSORY (I) so the steeringwheel does not lock. Make surethe radio and any items pluggedinto the accessory power socketsare turned off so you do not rundown the battery.

232231

every day immediately before you begintowing.

5-speed Manual Transmission Automatic Transmission

Towing Your Vehicle Behind a Motorhome

Driving198

Page 203: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Start the engine.

Press on the brake pedal. Shift thelever through all the positions (P,R, N, D, 2, 1)

Shift to D, then to N. Let theengine run for three minutes, thenturn off the engine.

Release the parking brake.

Leave the ignition switch inACCESSORY (I) so the steeringwheel does not lock. Make surethe radio and any items pluggedinto the accessory power socketsare turned off so you do not rundown the battery.

If you tow more than 8 hours in oneday, you should repeat the aboveprocedure at least every 8 hours.(when you stop for fuel, etc.)

If you tow a Element with anautomatic transmission, thetransmission fluid must be changedevery two years or 30,000 miles(48,000 km), whichever comes first.

Extended Towing

Towing Your Vehicle Behind a Motorhome

Driving 199

Failure to f ollow the above instructionsexactly will result in severe automatictransmission damage. If you cannotshif t the transmission or start theengine, your vehicle must betransported on a f lat-bed truck ortrailer.

The steering system can be damaged ifthe steering wheel is locked. Leave theignition switch in Accessory (I), andmake sure the steering wheel turnsf reely bef ore you begin towing.

Severe automatic transmission damagewill occur if the vehicle is shif ted f romreverse to neutral and then towed withthe drive wheels on the ground.

Page 204: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Your Element has been designedprimarily for use on pavement. Butits higher ground clearance allowsyou to occasionally travel on unpavedroads, to campgrounds, picnic sites,and similar locations. It is notdesigned for trail-blazing, mountainclimbing, or other challenging off-road activities.

If you decide to drive on unpavedroads, you will find that it requiressomewhat different driving skills.Your Element will also handlesomewhat differently than it does onpavement. So be sure to read thisowner’s manual, pay special attentionto the precautions and tips in thissection, and get acquainted withyour vehicle before you leave thepavement.

General Information

Off-Highway Guidelines

Driving200

Page 205: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Utility vehicles have a significantlyhigher rollover rate than other typesof vehicles. To avoid loss of controlor rollover, be sure to follow allrecommendations and precautionson page and in this section.

Seat belts are just as important off-road as on paved roads. Whereveryou drive, make sure you and yourpassengers always wear seat belts. Ifchildren or infants are along for theride, see that they are properlysecured. In a rollover crash, anunbelted person is more likely to diethan a person wearing a seat belt.

On many unpaved roads, you won’tfind lane markers, traffic signals, orsigns to warn you of possible troubleahead. It’s up to you to continuallyassess the situation and drive withinlimits.

The route presents limits (someroads are too steep and bumpy forexample). You have limits (in drivingskills and comfort). And your vehiclealso has limits (traction, stability, andpower, for instance).

Driving off-highway can behazardous if you fail to recognizelimits and take proper precautions.For example, you can have anaccident or rollover duringmaneuvers such as turning, drivingon hills, or over large obstacles.

Remember that your Element hashigher ground clearance and ahigher center of gravity thanpassenger vehicles designed for useonly on pavement. This means yourvehicle can more easily tip or rollover if you make abrupt turns ordrive on slopes.

Be sure to store cargo properly, anddo not exceed your Element’s cargoor trailer load limits (see pages

and ).

172

168 191

Important Safety Precautions

Off-Highway Guidelines

Driving 201

Improperly operating thisvehicle on or off-pavement cancause an accident or rollover inwhich you and your passengerscould be seriously injured orkilled.

Follow all instructions andguidelines in the owner’smanual.Keep your speed low anddon’t drive faster thanconditions permit.

Page 206: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

After you return to the pavement,carefully inspect your vehicle tomake sure there is no damage thatcould make driving it unsafe. Checkthe tires for damage and for properpressure.

Driving off-highway can be hard on avehicle. Before you leave thepavement, be sure all scheduledmaintenance and service has beendone, and that you have inspectedyour vehicle. Pay special attention tothe condition of the tires, and use agauge to check the tire pressures.

The following pages contain practicaltips on basic off-highway operation.

Off-highway, the general rule is tokeep your speed low. Of course,you’ll need enough speed to keepmoving forward. But at higherspeeds, you have less time to assessconditions and make good decisions.There’s also a greater chance ofsliding if you brake or turn tooquickly on wet soil, gravel, or ice. Inany situation, never go faster thanconditions allow.

For better traction on all surfaces,accelerate slowly and gradually buildup speed. If you try to start too faston wet soil, mud, snow, or ice, youmight not have enough traction toget underway. You may even digyourself into a hole. Starting with theshift lever in second gear (2) willhelp get you to a smooth start onsnow and ice.

Generally, the best off-pavementbraking technique is to gentlydepress the brake pedal, thenincrease pressure as more braking isneeded. Avoid hard braking. Keep inmind that you will usually need moretime and distance to brake to a stopon unpaved surfaces.

If you need to brake hard because ofan emergency, apply steady, evenpressure to the brake pedal. Do notpump the brakes; let the anti-lockbraking system pump them for you.If you pump the brakes, the anti-lockcannot work as efficiently, and yourstopping distance may be increased.

With ABS

Driving Tips

Check Out Your Vehicle

Controlling Speed

Accelerating and Braking

Off-Highway Guidelines

Driving202

Page 207: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Bumps, holes, rocks, and otherobstacles can be hazardous. Debrisin the road can damage yoursuspension or other components.Even small rocks can cut your tires.

More important, because yourvehicle has a high center of gravity,driving over a large obstacle, orallowing a wheel to drop into a deephole, can cause your vehicle to tip orroll over.

Drive slow enough to observeobstacles ahead and maneuveraround them. If you can’t avoid aserious obstacle, turn around andlook for a better route.

Before driving up or down a hill, stopand assess the situation. If you can’tclearly see all road conditions (goodtraction, no bumps, holes, or otherobstacles, a safe way out, etc.) walkthe slope before you drive on it. Ifyou have any doubt about whetheryou can safely drive on the slope,

. Find another route.

If you are driving up a hill and findthat you cannot continue (because ofthe steepness, a large obstacle, etc.),

. Your vehiclecould roll over. Slowly back down thehill, following the same route youtook up the hill.

You should have no problem makingsharp turns at low speed on levelground. But never make an abruptturn at higher speeds, on or offpavement. With a higher center ofgravity, your vehicle can more easilytip or roll over.

Off-highway, the basic turningtechnique is to drive at low speedand gradually adjust the amount ofsteering to suit the surface.

Test your brakes from time to timeto make sure they are operatingproperly. This will also give you afeel for how much traction you haveon a given surface.

don’t do it

do not try to turn around

Avoiding ObstaclesDriving on Slopes

Off-Highway Guidelines

Driving

Turning

203

Page 208: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Avoid driving through deep water. Ifyou encounter water in your route (asmall stream or large puddle, forexample), evaluate it carefully beforegoing ahead. Make sure it is shallow,flowing slowly, and has firm groundunderneath. If you are not sure ofthe depth or the ground, turn aroundand find another route.

Driving through deep water can alsodamage your vehicle. The water canget into the transmission anddifferential, diluting the lubricantand causing an eventual failure. Itcan also wash the grease out of thewheel bearings.

You should never use a jack to trygetting unstuck. A jack only workson firm, level ground. Also, yourvehicle could easily slip off the jackand hurt you or someone else.

Avoid driving on soft sand, deep mud,or other surfaces where you couldget stuck. If you do happen to getstuck because of inclement weatheror other conditions, choose a safeand appropriate course of action.

If You Encounter Water

If You Get Stuck

Off-Highway Guidelines

Driving204

Page 209: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

If you spin the wheels excessivelytrying to get unstuck, you mayoverheat the components of the4-wheel drive system. If this happens,the 4-wheel drive system shuts offand only the front wheels receivepower. If this happens, stop andallow everything to cool down. The4-wheel drive system will work againafter its temperature drops.

If you slip the clutch for a long timewhile trying to get unstuck, you mayoverheat and damage it.

Off-Highway Guidelines

Driving

4-Wheel Drive Vehicles

205

Page 210: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

206

Page 211: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

This section explains the importanceof keeping your vehicle wellmaintained and why you shouldfollow basic maintenance safetyprecautions.

This section also includesMaintenance Schedules for normaldriving and severe driving conditions,a Maintenance Record, and instruc-tions for simple maintenance tasksyou may want to take care ofyourself.

If you have the skills and tools to per-form more complex maintenancetasks on your Honda, you may wantto purchase the Service Manual. Seepage for information on how toobtain a copy, or see your Hondadealer.

......................Maintenance Safety . 208.Important Safety Precautions . 209

.................Maintenance Schedule . 210...Required Maintenance Record . 217

.......Owner Maintenance Checks . 219..............................Fluid Locations . 220

......................................Engine Oil . 221..................................Adding Oil . 221

....................Recommended Oil . 221..............................Synthetic Oil . 222

....................................Additives . 222.....Changing the Oil and Filter . 223

.............................Cooling System . 225............Adding Engine Coolant . 225

.......Replacing Engine Coolant . 227....................Windshield Washers . 230

.......................Transmission Fluid . 231..........Automatic Transmission . 231

5-speed Manual.........................Transmission . 232

.................Rear Differential Fluid . 233................Brake and Clutch Fluid . 234

............................Brake System . 234...........................Clutch System . 235

..............................Power Steering . 235.....................Air Cleaner Element . 236

....................................Hood Latch . 237

....................................Spark Plugs . 238..............................Replacement . 238............................Specifications . 239

...........................................Battery . 240.................................Wiper Blades . 242

..............Air Conditioning System . 245..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 246

.......................................Drive Belt . 248...............................................Tires . 249

......................................Inflation . 249Recommended Tire

Pressures for Normal...........................Driving . 250

..................................Inspection . 251..............................Maintenance . 251.............................Tire Rotation . 252

...Replacing Tires and Wheels . 253......................Wheels and Tires . 254

..........................Winter Driving . 254.............................Snow Tires . 254............................Tire Chains . 255

.............................................Lights . 256.....................Headlight Aiming . 258

........................Replacing Bulbs . 258....................Storing Your Vehicle . 266

323

Maintenance

Maintenance 207

Page 212: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Regularly maintaining your vehicle isthe best way to protect yourinvestment. Proper maintenance isessential to your safety and thesafety of your passengers. It will alsoreward you with more economical,trouble-free driving, and help reduceair pollution.

Some of the most important safetyprecautions are given here. However,we cannot warn you of everyconceivable hazard that can arise inperforming maintenance. Only youcan decide whether or not youshould perform a given task.

This section includes instructions forsimple maintenance tasks, such aschecking and adding oil. Any serviceitems not detailed in this sectionshould be performed by a Hondatechnician or other qualifiedmechanic.

Maintenance

Maintenance Safety

208

Failure to properly followmaintenance instructions andprecautions can cause you tobe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the proceduresand precautions in this owner’smanual.

Improperly maintaining thisvehicle or failing to correct aproblem before driving cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the inspectionand maintenancerecommendations andschedules in this owner’smanual.

Page 213: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Before you begin any maintenance,make sure your vehicle is parked onlevel ground and that the parkingbrake is set. Also, be sure the engineis off. This will help to eliminateseveral potential hazards:

Be surethere is adequate ventilationwhenever you operate the engine.

Let theengine and exhaust system coolbefore touching any parts.

Donot run the engine unless in-structed to do so.

Read the instructions before youbegin, and make sure you have thetools and skills required.

To reduce the possibility of fire orexplosion, be careful when workingaround gasoline or batteries. Use acommercially available degreaser orparts cleaner, not gasoline, to cleanparts. Keep cigarettes, sparks, andflames away from the battery and allfuel-related parts.

You should wear eye protection andprotective clothing when workingnear the battery or when usingcompressed air.

Maintenance Safety

Maintenance

Important Safety Precautions

Carbon monoxide poisoningfrom engine exhaust.

Burns from hot parts.

Injury from moving parts.

209

Page 214: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

The services and time or distanceintervals shown in the maintenanceschedule assume you will use yourvehicle as normal transportation forpassengers and their possessions.You should also follow theserecommendations:

The Maintenance Schedule specifieshow often you should have yourvehicle serviced and what thingsneed attention. It is essential thatyou have your vehicle serviced asscheduled to retain its high level ofsafety, dependability, and emissionscontrol performance.

Avoid exceeding your vehicle’sload limit. This puts excess stresson the engine, brakes, and manyother parts of your vehicle. Theload limit is shown on the label onthe driver’s doorjamb.

Operate your vehicle onreasonable roads within the legalspeed limit.

Drive your vehicle regularly over adistance of several miles(kilometers).

Always use unleaded gasoline withthe proper octane rating (see page

).

Service your vehicle according to thetime and mileage periods on one ofthe Maintenance Schedules on thefollowing pages.

Follow theMaintenance Schedule for SevereConditions if you drive your vehicleMAINLY under one or more of thefollowing conditions.

Driving less than 5 miles (8 km)per trip or, in freezingtemperatures, driving less than 10miles (16 km) per trip.

Driving in extremely hot [over90°F (32°C)] conditions.

Extensive idling or long periods ofstop-and-go driving.

Trailer towing, driving with a roofrack, or driving in mountainousconditions.158

Maintenance Schedule

Maintenance

Which Schedule to Follow:

U.S. Owners

210

Page 215: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

U.S. Vehicles:

According to state and federalregulations, failure to performmaintenance on the items markedwith will not void your emissionswarranties. However, Hondarecommends that all maintenanceservices be performed at therecommended time or mileageperiod to ensure long-term reliability.

We recommend the use of genuineHonda parts and fluids whenever youhave maintenance done. These aremanufactured to the same high-quality standards as the originalcomponents, so you can be confidentof their performance and durability.

Your authorized Honda dealerknows your vehicle best and canprovide competent, efficient service.However, service at a dealer is notmandatory to keep your warrantiesin effect. Maintenance may be doneby any qualified service facility orperson who is skilled in this type ofautomotive service. Keep all thereceipts as proof of completion, andhave the person who does the workfill out the Maintenance Record.Check your warranty booklet formore information.

Driving on muddy, dusty, or de-iced roads.

NOTE: If you only OCCASIONALLYor NEVER, drive under a ‘‘severe’’condition, you should follow theMaintenance Schedule for NormalConditions.

Follow theMaintenance Schedule for SevereConditions.

Maintenance

Maintenance Schedule

Maintenance, replacement, orrepair of emissions controldevices and systems may be doneby any automotive repairestablishment or individual usingparts that are ‘‘certif ied’’ to EPAstandards.

Canadian Owners

211

Page 216: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

*#

Maintenance212

Service at the indicated distance or time whichever comes first. miles x 1,000km x 1,000months

1016

5080

70112

110176

Check oil and coolant at each fuel stop

Every 3 years (independent of mileage)

At 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years,then every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 5 years

2032

3048

4064

6096

80128

100160

Replace at 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 6 years, then every 90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 5 years.See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last column, page .

Inspect every 110,000 miles (176,000 km), otherwise adjust only if noisyEvery 110,000 miles (176,000 km)Every 30,000 miles (48,000 km)

Service the following items at the recommended intervals.

Check engine oil and coolantReplace engine oilRotate tires (Check tire inflation and condition at least once per month)Replace engine oil filterInspect front and rear brakesCheck parking brake adjustmentVisually inspect the following items:

Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and bootsSuspension componentsDriveshaft bootsBrake hoses and lines (including ABS)All fluid levels and condition of fluidsExhaust systemFuel lines and connections

Inspect and adjust drive beltReplace dust and pollen filterReplace transmission fluid

Inspect idle speedReplace rear differential fluid (4WD)

Replace air cleaner elementReplace spark plugsInspect valve clearanceReplace engine coolant

Replace brake fluid

90144

Every 160,000 miles (256,000 km) or 8 years

120192

24 48 7212 36 60

M/TA/T

:: 211

Main

tenance

Sch

edule

for

Norm

alC

onditi

ons

Page 217: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

--

□□□□□□□□□□

□□□□□

□□□

□□

Maintenance 213

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

A, B, C, D

A

B

C

D

Refer to page to determine which schedule to use.Use the Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions.

Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first. Do the items in as required for each distance/time.

Replace engine oil.Rotate tires (follow pattern on page 252 ).Replace engine oil filter.Inspect front and rear brakes.Check parking brake adjustment.Inspect tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots.Inspect suspension components.Inspect driveshaft boots.Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ABS).Check all fluid levels, condition of fluids, and checkfor leaks.Inspect exhaust system.Inspect fuel lines and connections.

Inspect and adjust drive belt.Replace dust and pollen filter.Replace air cleaner element every 30,000 mi/48,000km (independent of time).

10,000 mi/16,000 km/1 yr20,000 mi/32,000 km/1 yr30,000 mi/48,000 km30,000 mi/48,000 km/2 yrs40,000 mi/64,000 km/2 yrs3 yrs50,000 mi/80,000 km/3 yrs60,000 mi/96,000 km60,000 mi/96,000 km/3 yrs70,000 mi/112,000 km/4 yrs80,000 mi/128,000 km/4 yrs90,000 mi/144,000 km90,000 mi/144,000 km/5 yrs

100,000 mi/160,000 km/5 yrs110,000 mi/176,000 km

6 yrs110,000 mi/176,000 km/6 yrs120,000 mi/192,000 km120,000 mi/192,000 km/6 yrs

120,000 mi/192,000 km/10 yrs

160,000 mi/256,000 km/8 yrs

Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do item in D.Do items in A, C.Do items in A, B.

Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage).Do items in A.Do item in D.Do items in A, B, C.Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do item in D.Do items in A, C.

Replace rear differential fluid (4WD).Do items in A, B.

Inspect valve clearance, cold engine.Replace spark plugs.Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage).

Do items in A.Do item in D.

Replace transmission fluid (M/T).Replace transmission fluid (A/T), then

replace every 90,000 mi/144,000 km/5 yrs.Do items in A, B, C.

Replace engine coolant, then replace every60,000mi/96,000km/5 yrs.

Inspect idle speed.

:

212

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, lastcolumn, page .

Check engine oil and coolant at each fuel stop.Check and adjust valve clearance, cold engine, only if noisy.

NOTE:

211

Main

tenance

Sch

edule

for

Norm

alC

onditio

ns

(listed

by

dista

nce

/time)

Page 218: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

*#

# #

Maintenance214

Service at the indicated distance or time whichever comes first. miles x 1,000km x 1,000months

Replace every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 monthsCheck oil and coolant at each fuel stop

1016

5080

70112

110176

At 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years,then every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 5 years

Every 3 years (independent of mileage)

At 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 3 years, then every 30,000 miles(48,000 km) or 2 years

2032

3048

4064

80128

100160

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last column, page .See dust and pollen filter on page for replacement information under special driving conditions.

Inspect every 110,000 miles (176,000 km), otherwise adjust only if noisyEvery 110,000 miles (176,000 km)

Every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) in dusty conditions,otherwise use normal schedule

Service the following items at the recommended intervals.

6096

90144

Check engine oil and coolantReplace engine oilRotate tires (Check tire inflation and condition at least once per month)Replace engine oil filterInspect front and rear brakesLubricate all hinges, locks, and latchesVisually inspect the following items:

Tie rod ends, steering gear, box, and bootsSuspension componentsDriveshaft boots

Check parking brake adjustmentVisually inspect the following items:

Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)All fluid levels and condition of fluidsExhaust system, Fuel lines, and connections

Lights and controls, Vehicle underbodyInspect and adjust drive beltReplace dust and pollen filterReplace transmission fluid

Replace rear differential fluid (4WD)Inspect idle speed

Replace air cleaner element

Replace spark plugsInspect valve clearanceReplace engine coolant

Replace brake fluid

Every 160,000 miles (256,000 km) or 8 years

120192

24 48 7212 36 60

M/TA/T

::

246211

Main

tenance

Sch

edule

for

Seve

reC

onditi

ons

Page 219: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

--

□□□□□

□□□□□□

□□□□□□□

□□□

CONTINUEDMaintenance 215

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

A, B, C, D, E

A

B

C

D

E

Refer to page to determine which schedule to use.Use the Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions.

Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first. Do the items in as required for each distance/time.

Replace engine oil.Replace engine oil filter.Inspect front and rear brakes.Rotate tires (follow pattern on page 252 ).Lubricate all hinges, locks, and latches withmultipurpose grease.Inspect tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots.Inspect suspension components.Inspect driveshaft boots.Check parking brake adjustment.Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ABS).Check all fluid levels, condition of fluids, and checkfor leaks.Inspect exhaust system.Inspect fuel lines and connections.

Check all lights.Inspect the underbody.Inspect and adjust drive belt.Replace dust and pollen filter .Replace air cleaner element every 15,000 mi/24,000 km (independent of time) under dustyconditions, otherwise use Normal Conditionsschedule.

Do item in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A, E.Do items in A, B, C.Do item in A.Do item in E.Do items in A, B, D.Do item in A.Do items in A, B, C.Do items in A, E.

Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage).Do items in A, B.Do item in A.Do item in E.

Replace transmission fluid (M/T).Replace transmission fluid (A/T).Replace rear differential fluid (4WD).

Do items in A, B, C, D.Do item in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A, E.Do items in A, B, C.Do item in A.Do item in E.

Replace transmission fluid (A/T).Do items in A, B, D.

5,000 mi/8,000 km10,000 mi/16,000 km/1 yr15,000 mi/24,000 km20,000 mi/32,000 km/1 yr25,000 mi/40,000 km30,000 mi/48,000 km30,000 mi/48,000 km/2 yrs35,000 mi/56,000 km40,000 mi/64,000 km/2 yrs45,000 mi/72,000 km3 yrs50,000 mi/80,000 km/3 yrs55,000 mi/88,000 km60,000 mi/96,000 km60,000 mi/96,000 km/3 yrs

65,000 mi/104,000 km70,000 mi/112,000 km/4 yrs75,000 mi/120,000 km80,000 mi/128,000 km/4 yrs85,000 mi/136,000 km90,000 mi/144,000 km90,000 mi/144,000 km/5 yrs

212 Main

tenance

Sch

edule

for

Seve

reC

onditio

ns

(listed

by

dista

nce

/time)

Page 220: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

□□□

□□

□□□

Maintenance216

See dust and pollen filter on page for replacement informationunder special driving conditions.See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, lastcolumn, page .

Check engine oil and coolant at each fuel stop.Check and adjust valve clearance, cold engine, only if noisy.

NOTE:

:

:

246

211

Do item in A.Do items in A, B, C.Do items in A, E.

Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage).Inspect valve clearance, cold engine.Replace spark plugs.

Do items in A, B.Do item in A.Do item in E.

Replace transmission fluid (M/T).Replace rear differential fluid (4WD).

Do items in A, B, C, D.Replace transmission fluid (A/T).Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage).Replace engine coolant, then replace every

60,000mi/96,000km/5 yrs.Inspect idle speed.

95,000 mi/152,000 km100,000 mi/160,000 km/5 yrs105,000 mi/168,000 km6 yrs110,000 mi/176,000 km

110,000 mi/176,000 km/6 yrs115,000 mi/184,000 km120,000 mi/192,000 km120,000 mi/192,000 km/6 yrs

120,000 mi/192,000 km/7 yrs9 yrs120,000 mi/192,000 km/10 yrs

160,000 mi/256,000 km/8 yrs

Main

tenance

Sch

edule

for

Seve

reC

onditi

ons

(lis

ted

by

dis

tance

/tim

e)

Page 221: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

CONTINUEDMaintenance

Required Maintenance Record (for Normal and Severe Schedules)

217

5,000 mi

10,000 mi

15,000 mi

20,000 mi

25,000 mi

30,000 mi

35,000 mi

40,000 mi

45,000 mi

50,000 mi

55,000 mi

60,000 mi

Signature or dealer stamp Signature or dealer stamp8,000 km

16,000 km

24,000 km

32,000 km(or 1 year)

40,000 km

48,000 km

56,000 km

64,000 km(or 2 years)

72,000 km

80,000 km

88,000 km

96,000 km(or 3 years)

You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here, whether you follow the schedule for normal conditions (page ) or severeconditions (page ). Keep the receipts for all work done on your vehicle.

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

Date

Date

Date

Date

Date

Date Date

Date

Date

Date

Date

Date

212214

Page 222: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Maintenance

Required Maintenance Record (for Normal and Severe Schedules)

218

65,000 mi

70,000 mi

75,000 mi

80,000 mi

85,000 mi

90,000 mi

95,000 mi

100,000 mi

105,000 mi

110,000 mi

115,000 mi

120,000 mi

Signature or dealer stamp Signature or dealer stamp104,000 km

112,000 km

120,000 km

128,000 km(or 4 years)

136,000 km

144,000 km

152,000 km

160,000 km(or 5 years)

168,000 km

176,000 km

184,000 km

192,000 km(or 6 years)

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

Date

Date

Date

Date

Date

Date Date

Date

Date

Date

Date

Date

Page 223: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Engine oil level Check everytime you fill the fuel tank. Seepage .

Engine coolant level Check theradiator reserve tank every timeyou fill the fuel tank. See page .

Windshield washer fluid Checkthe level in the reservoir monthly.If weather conditions cause you touse the washers frequently, checkthe reservoir each time you stopfor fuel. See page .

You should check the followingitems at the specified intervals. Ifyou are unsure of how to performany check, turn to the page given.

Tires Check the tire pressuremonthly. Examine the tread forwear and foreign objects. See page

.

Automatic transmission Checkthe fluid level monthly. See page

.

Brakes Check the fluid levelmonthly. See page .

Lights Check the operation ofthe headlights, parking lights,taillights, high-mount brake light,turn signals, brake lights, andlicense plate light monthly. Seepage .

162

163

231

234

256

230

251

Owner Maintenance Checks

Maintenance 219

Page 224: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Fluid Locations

Maintenance220

ENGINE OILFILL CAP

ENGINE OILDIPSTICK(Orange loop)

POWER STEERINGFLUID(Red cap)

WASHER FLUID(Blue cap)

RADIATOR CAP

BRAKE FLUID(Gray cap)

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSIONFLUID DIPSTICK(Yellow loop)

ENGINE COOLANTRESERVOIR

CLUTCH FLUID(5-speed ManualTransmission only)(Gray cap)

Page 225: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

To add oil, unscrew and remove theengine oil fill cap on top of the valvecover. Pour in the oil, and install theengine oil fill cap. Tighten it securely.Wait a few minutes and recheck theoil level. Do not fill above the uppermark; you could damage the engine.

Make sure the API Certification Sealsays ‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’Oil is a major contributor to your

engine’s performance and longevity.Always use a premium-grade 5W-20detergent oil displaying the APICertification Seal. This seal indicatesthe oil is energy conserving, and thatit meets the American PetroleumInstitute’s latest requirements.

Honda Motor Oil is the preferred5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It ishighly recommended that you useHonda Motor Oil in your vehicle foroptimum engine protection.

Pour the oil slowly and carefully soyou do not spill. Clean up any spillsimmediately. Spilled oil coulddamage components in the enginecompartment. CONTINUED

Recommended OilAdding Oil

Engine Oil

Maintenance 221

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

API CERTIFICATION SEAL

Page 226: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

The oil’s viscosity or weight isprovided on the container’s label.Select the oil for your vehicleaccording to this chart.

You may use a synthetic motor oil ifit meets the same requirementsgiven for a conventional motor oil: itdisplays the API Certification Seal,and it is the proper weight as shownon the chart. When using syntheticoil, you must follow the oil and filterchange intervals given in themaintenance schedule.

Your Honda does not require any oiladditives. Additives may adverselyaffect your engine’s or transmission’sperformance and durability.

5W-20 oil is formulated for year-round protection of your Honda, toimprove cold weather starting, andto help your engine use less fuel.

Engine Oil

Maintenance

Synthetic Oil

Additives

222

Ambient Temperature

Page 227: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Remove the oil filter and let theremaining oil drain. A specialwrench (available from yourHonda dealer) is required toremove the filter.

Install a new oil filter according toinstructions that come with it.

Run the engine until it reachesnormal operating temperature,then shut it off.

Open the hood and remove theengine oil fill cap. Remove the oildrain bolt and washer from thebottom of the engine. Drain the oilinto an appropriate container.

Always change the oil and filteraccording to the time and distance(miles/kilometers) recommenda-tions in the maintenance schedule.The oil and filter collect contami-nants that can damage your engine ifthey are not removed regularly.

Changing the oil and filter requiresspecial tools and access fromunderneath the vehicle. The vehicleshould be raised on a service station-type hydraulic lift for this service.Unless you have the knowledge andproper equipment, you should havethis maintenance done by a skilledmechanic.

1.

2.

4.

3.

CONTINUED

Changing the Oil and Filter

Engine Oil

Maintenance 223

WASHER

OIL DRAIN BOLT

OIL FILTER

Page 228: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Put a new washer on the drain bolt,then reinstall the drain bolt.Tighten it to:

Replace the engine oil fill cap.Start the engine. The oil pressureindicator light should go out withinfive seconds. If it does not, turn offthe engine and reinspect yourwork.

Let the engine run for severalminutes, then check the drain boltand oil filter for leaks.

Turn off the engine, let it sit forseveral minutes, then check the oillevel. If necessary, add oil to bringthe level to the upper mark on thedipstick.

Refill the engine with the recom-mended oil.

Engine oil change capacity(including filter):

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

Engine Oil

Maintenance224

33 lbf·ft (44 N·m , 4.5 kgf·m)

4.4 US qt (4.2 )

Improper disposal of engine oil can beharmf ul to the environment. If youchange your own oil, please dispose ofthe used oil properly. Put it in a sealedcontainer and take it to a recyclingcenter. Do not discard it in a trash binor dump it on the ground.

Page 229: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

If the coolant level in the reservetank is at or below the MIN line, addcoolant to bring it up to the MAX line.Inspect the cooling system for leaks.The coolant you add should alwaysbe a mixture of 50 percent antifreezeand 50 percent water. Never addstraight antifreeze or plain water.

Always use Honda All SeasonAntifreeze/Coolant Type 2. Thiscoolant is pre-mixed with 50 percentantifreeze and 50 percent water. Itdoes not require any additionalmixing. If it is not available, you mayuse another major-brand non-silicatecoolant as a temporary replacement.Make sure it is a high-quality coolantrecommended for aluminum engines.However, continued use of any non-Honda coolant can result incorrosion, causing the coolingsystem to malfunction or fail. Havethe cooling system flushed andrefilled with Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as possible.

If the reserve tank is completelyempty, you should also check thecoolant level in the radiator.

Make sure the engine and radiatorare cool.

1.

CONTINUED

Adding Engine Coolant

Cooling System

Maintenance 225

RESERVE TANK

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

Page 230: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

The coolant level should be up tothe base of the filler neck. Addcoolant if it is low.

Turn the radiator cap counter-clockwise, without pressing downon it, until it stops. This relievesany pressure remaining in thecooling system.

Remove the radiator cap bypushing down and turningcounterclockwise.

Do not add any rust inhibitors orother additives to your vehicle’scooling system. They may not becompatible with the coolant orengine components.

Put the radiator cap back on.Tighten it fully.

Pour coolant into the reserve tank.Fill it to halfway between the MAXand MIN marks. Put the cap backon the reserve tank.

Pour the coolant slowly and carefullyso you do not spill. Clean up anyspills immediately. Spilled coolantcould damage components in theengine compartment.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Cooling System

Maintenance226

RADIATOR CAP RESERVE TANK

Page 231: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

CONTINUED

The cooling system should becompletely drained and refilled withnew coolant according to the timeand distance recommendations inthe maintenance schedule. Only useHonda All Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2.

Draining the coolant requires accessto the underside of the vehicle.Unless you have the tools andknowledge, you should have thismaintenance done by a skilledmechanic.

Turn the ignition ON (II). Turnthe heater temperature controldial fully clockwise. Turn theignition off.

Open the hood. Make sure theengine and radiator are cool to thetouch.

Remove the radiator cap. Loosen the drain plug on thebottom of the radiator. Thecoolant will drain through thesplash guard.1.

2.

3. 4.

Replacing Engine Coolant

Cooling System

Maintenance 227

Page 232: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Remove the reserve tankmounting bolt with a wrench, andremove the reserve tank from itsbottom holder by pulling it upwhile rotating it about 360° toavoid hitting the fan shroud.

Drain the coolant, then put thetank back in its holder. Reinstallthe reserve tank mounting boltand tighten it securely.

When the coolant stops draining,tighten the drain plug at thebottom of the radiator.

Pour Honda All SeasonAntifreeze/Coolant Type 2 intothe radiator up to the base of thefiller neck. This coolant is amixture of 50 percent antifreezeand 50 percent water. Pre-mixingis not required.

5.

6.

7.

8.

Cooling System

Maintenance228

Page 233: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Fill the reserve tank to the MAXmark. Install the reserve tank cap.

Install the radiator cap, andtighten it to the first stop.

Remove the radiator cap. Fill theradiator with coolant up to thebase of the filler neck.

Start the engine and hold it at1,500 rpm until the radiator fancomes on. Turn off the engine.Check the coolant level in theradiator and add coolant if needed.

Install the radiator cap, andtighten it fully.

If necessary, fill the reserve tankto the MAX mark. Install thereserve tank cap.

Start the engine and let it run untilthe radiator cooling fan comes onat least twice. Then stop theengine.

Start the engine and let it run forabout 30 seconds. Then turn offthe engine.

Check the level in the radiator,add coolant if needed.

The cooling system capacity is:

9.

10.11.

12.

13.

14.

15.

16.

17.

With automatic transmission:

With manual transmission:

Maintenance

Cooling System

229

1.43 US gal (5.4 )

1.45 US gal (5.5 )

Page 234: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Check the level in the windshieldwasher reservoir at least monthlyduring normal use. In bad weather,when you use the washers often,check the level every time youstop for fuel. This reservoirsupplies the windshield and rearwindow washers.

The windshield washer reservoiris located behind the passenger’sside headlight. Check thereservoir’s fluid level by removingthe cap and looking at the levelgauge attached to the cap.

The low washer level indicator willlight when the level is low (seepage ).

Fill the reservoir with a good-qualitywindshield washer fluid. Thisincreases the cleaning capability andprevents freezing in cold weather.

When you refill the reservoir, cleanthe edges of the windshield wiperblades with windshield washer fluidon a clean cloth. This will help tocondition the blade edges.

69

On Canadian models

Maintenance

Windshield Washers

230

Do not use engine antif reeze or avinegar/water solution in thewindshield washer reservoir.

Antif reeze can damage your vehicle’spaint, while a vinegar/water solutioncan damage the windshield washerpump.

Use only commercially-availablewindshield washer f luid.

Page 235: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Remove the dipstick and checkthe fluid level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)

from the transmission, and wipe itwith a clean cloth.

Park the vehicle on level ground.Shut off the engine.

Check the fluid level with the engineat normal operating temperature.

Insert the dipstick all the way intothe transmission as shown. To thoroughly flush the transmission,

the technician should drain and refillit with Honda ATF-Z1, then drive thevehicle a short distance. Do thisthree times. Then drain and refill thetransmission a final time.

If the level is below the lowermark, add fluid into the filler holeto bring it to the upper mark.

Always use Honda ATF-Z1(Automatic Transmission Fluid). Ifit is not available, you may use aDEXRON III automatictransmission fluid as a temporaryreplacement. However, continueduse can affect shift quality. Havethe transmission flushed andrefilled with Honda ATF-Z1 assoon as it is convenient.

1.

2.

3.

5.

4.

CONTINUED

Automatic Transmission

Maintenance

Transmission Fluid

231

DIPSTICK

UPPERMARKLOWERMARK

Page 236: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Insert the dipstick all the way backinto the transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

The transmission should be drainedand refilled with new fluid accordingto the time and distance recommen-dations in the maintenance schedule.

Check the fluid level with thetransmission at normal operatingtemperature and the vehicle sittingon level ground. Remove thetransmission filler bolt and carefullyfeel inside the bolt hole with yourfinger. The fluid level should be upto the edge of the bolt hole. If it isnot, add Honda ManualTransmission Fluid (MTF) until itstarts to run out of the hole.

Put a new washer on the filler bolt,then reinstall the filler bolt andtighten it securely.

If you are not sure how to add fluid,contact your Honda dealer.

If Honda MTF is not available, youmay use an SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40viscosity motor oil with the APICertification seal that says ‘‘FORGASOLINE ENGINES’’ as atemporary replacement. However,motor oil does not contain the properadditives, and continued use cancause stiffer shifting. Replace assoon as it is convenient.

The transmission should be drainedand refilled with new fluid accordingto the time and distance recommen-dations in the maintenance schedule.

6. 5-speed Manual Transmission

Transmission Fluid

Maintenance232

WASHER FILLER BOLT

Correct level

Page 237: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

The rear differential should bedrained and refilled with new fluidaccording to the time and distancerecommendations in the mainte-nance schedule.

Check the fluid level with the reardifferential at normal operatingtemperature and the vehicle on levelground. Remove the differential fluidfiller bolt and washer, and carefullyfeel inside the bolt hole with yourfinger. The fluid level should be upto the edge of the bolt hole. If it isnot, slowly add Honda Dual PumpFluid until it starts to run out of thehole.

Put a new washer on the filler bolt,then reinstall the filler bolt andtighten it securely.

Use only Honda Dual Pump Fluid.Do not use Automatic TransmissionFluid (ATF).

4WD models only

Rear Differential Fluid

Maintenance 233

Correctlevel

FILLER BOLT WASHER

Page 238: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If the level is at orbelow the MIN mark, your brakesystem needs attention. Have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

Always use Honda Heavy DutyBrake Fluid DOT 3. If it is notavailable, you should use only DOT 3or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealedcontainer, as a temporaryreplacement. However, the use ofany non-Honda brake fluid can causecorrosion and decrease the life of thesystem. Have the brake systemflushed and refilled with HondaHeavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 assoon as possible.

Check the fluid level in the reser-voirs monthly. There are up to tworeservoirs, depending on the model.They are:

Brake fluid reservoir (all models)Clutch fluid reservoir(manual transmission only)

The brake fluid should be replacedaccording to the time recommenda-tion in the maintenance schedule.

Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is notcompatible with your vehicle’sbraking system and can causeextensive damage.

Brake System

Brake and Clutch Fluid

Maintenance234

MIN

MAX

Page 239: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Always use Honda Power SteeringFluid. If it is not available, you mayuse another power steering fluid asan emergency replacement.However, continued use can causeincreased wear and poor steering incold weather. Have the powersteering system flushed and refilledwith Honda PSF as soon as possible.

A low power steering fluid level canindicate a leak in the system. Checkthe fluid level frequently, and havethe system inspected as soon aspossible.Check the level when the engine is

cold. Look at the side of thereservoir. The fluid should bebetween the UPPER LEVEL andLOWER LEVEL. If it is below theLOWER LEVEL, add power steeringfluid to the UPPER LEVEL.

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If it is not, addbrake fluid to bring it up to that level.Use the same fluid specified for thebrake system.

Low fluid level can indicate a leak inthe clutch system. Have this systeminspected as soon as possible.

Power SteeringClutch System

Brake and Clutch Fluid, Power Steering

Maintenance 235

LOWER LEVEL

MAX

MIN

UPPER LEVEL

Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef tor right lock and holding it there candamage the power steering pump.

Page 240: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

To replace it:

The air cleaner element should bereplaced according to the distancerecommendation in the maintenanceschedule.

The air cleaner element is inside theair cleaner housing on the left side ofthe engine compartment.

Remove the old air cleanerelement.

Carefully clean the inside of theair cleaner housing with a damprag.

Loosen the four bolts with aPhillips-head screwdriver or awrench, then lift up the air cleanerhousing cover.

1.

2.

3.

Replacement

Air Cleaner Element

Maintenance236

BOLTS AIR CLEANER ELEMENT

BOLTS

Page 241: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Place the new air cleaner elementin the air cleaner housing.

Clean the hood latch assembly with amild cleaner, then lubricate it with amultipurpose grease. Lubricate allthe moving parts (as shown),including the pivot. Follow the timeand distance recommendations inthe Maintenance Schedule. If youare not sure how to clean and greasethe latch, contact your Honda dealer.

Reinstall the air cleaner housingcover, and tighten the four bolts.

4.

5.

Hood Latch

Air Cleaner Element, Hood Latch

Maintenance 237

LATCH ASSEMBLY

Page 242: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Clean off any dirt and oil that havecollected around the ignition coils.

Use a wrench to remove the boltholding the ignition coil. Pull theignition coil up slightly.

Disconnect the wire connectorfrom the ignition coil by pushingon the lock tab and pulling on theconnector. Pull on the plasticconnector, not the wires.

Remove the ignition coil.

Remove the spark plug witha five-eighths inch (16 mm) sparkplug socket.

Put the new spark plug into thesocket, then screw it into the hole.Screw it in by hand so you do notcrossthread it.

Remove the four nuts with awrench, then remove the coilcover.

The spark plugs in your vehicle are aspecial iridium-tipped design forlonger life. The spark plugs shouldbe replaced according to the distancerecommendation in the maintenanceschedule.

1.

6.

7.

5.2.

4.

3.

Replacement

Spark Plugs

Maintenance238

NUTS NUTS

BOLT CONNECTOR

IGNITION COIL

LOCK TAB

COIL COVER

Page 243: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Torque the spark plug. (If you donot have a torque wrench, tightenthe spark plug two-thirds of a turnafter it contacts the cylinder head.)Tightening torque:

Connect the wire connector to theignition coil. Make sure it locks inplace.

Push the ignition coil down all theway. Install the bolt.

Repeat this procedure for theother three spark plugs.

Reinstall the coil cover, andtighten the four nuts.

Install the ignition coil into thehole.

NGK:DENSO:

8.

9.

10.

11.

12.

13.

Specifications:

Spark Plugs

Maintenance 239

13 lbf·ft (18 N·m , 1.8 kgf·m)

IZFR6K-11SKJ20DR-M11

Tighten the spark plugs caref ully. Aspark plug that is too loose canoverheat and damage the engine.Overtightening can cause damage tothe threads in the cylinder head.

Page 244: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Check the battery terminals forcorrosion (a white or yellowishpowder). To remove it, cover theterminals with a solution of bakingsoda and water. It will bubble up andturn brown. When this stops, wash itoff with plain water. Dry off thebattery with a cloth or paper towel.Coat the terminals with grease tohelp prevent future corrosion.

Check the battery condition bylooking at the test indicator windowon the battery. The label on thebattery explains the test indicator’scolors.

Battery posts,terminals, and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds.

Check the condition of your vehicle’sbattery monthly.

WARNING:

Wash hands after handling.

Battery

Maintenance240

TEST INDICATOR WINDOW

Page 245: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

If you need to connect the battery toa charger, disconnect both cables toprevent damage to the vehicle’selectrical system.

If the terminals are severely cor-roded, clean them with baking sodaand water. Then use a wrench toloosen and remove the cables fromthe terminals. Always disconnect thenegative ( ) cable first and recon-nect it last. Clean the battery termi-nals with a terminal cleaning tool orwire brush. Reconnect and tightenthe cables, then coat the terminalswith grease.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, the audiosystem will disable itself. The nexttime you turn on the radio you willsee ‘‘CODE’’ in the frequency display.Use the preset buttons to enter thefive-digit code (see page ). Youwill then have to set the clock andenter your station presets.

152

On EX models

Battery

Maintenance 241

The battery gives off explosivehydrogen gas during normaloperation.

A spark or flame can cause thebattery to explode with enoughforce to kill or seriously hurt you.

Wear protective clothing and aface shield, or have a skilledmechanic do the batterymaintenance.

Charging the battery with the cablesconnected can seriously damage yourvehicle’s electronic controls. Detachthe battery cables bef ore connectingthe battery to a charger.

Page 246: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Check the condition of the wiperblades at least every six months.Look for signs of cracking in therubber, or areas that are gettinghard. Replace the blades if you findthese signs, or if they leave streaksand unwiped areas when used.

To replace a wiper blade:

Front:Raise the wiper arm off thewindshield.

Raise the wiper arm off the hatchglass and hold it.

Rear:

1.

Wiper Blades

Maintenance242

FRONT REAR

WIPER ARMS

Do not open the hood when the wiperarms are raised, or you will damage thehood and the arms.

Page 247: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Examine the new wiper blades. Ifthey have no plastic or metal rein-forcement along the back edge,remove the metal reinforcementstrips from the old wiper blade andinstall them in the slots along theedge of the new blade.

Remove the blade from its holderby grasping the tabbed end of theblade. Pull firmly until the tabscome out of the holder.

Disconnect the blade assemblyfrom the wiper arm by pushing inthe lock tab. Hold the lock tab inwhile you push the blade assemblytoward the base of the arm.

If you are changing the rear wiperblade, go to step 6.

4.3.2.

CONTINUED

Wiper Blades

Maintenance 243

LOCK TAB

BLADE REINFORCEMENT

BLADE

Page 248: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Slide the new wiper blade into theholder until the tabs lock.

Slide the wiper blade assemblyonto the wiper arm. Make sure itlocks in place.

Lower the wiper arm down againstthe windshield or the hatch glass.

5.

6.

7.

Wiper Blades

Maintenance244

Page 249: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Run the air conditioning at least oncea week during the cold weathermonths. Run it for at least tenminutes while you are driving at asteady speed with the engine atnormal operating temperature. Thiscirculates the lubricating oil con-tained in the refrigerant.

If the air conditioning does not get ascold as before, have your dealercheck the system. Recharge thesystem with Refrigerant HFC-134a(R-134a). (See Specifications on page

.)

Your vehicle’s air conditioning is asealed system. Any major mainte-nance, such as recharging, should bedone by a qualified mechanic. Youcan do a couple of things to makesure the air conditioning worksefficiently.

Periodically check the engine’sradiator and air conditioningcondenser for leaves, insects, anddirt stuck to the front surface. Theseblock the air flow and reduce coolingefficiency. Use a light spray from ahose or a soft brush to remove them.

307

On U.S. EX, and Canadian DX and EXmodels

Air Conditioning System

Maintenance 245

AIR CONDITIONING CONDENSER

Whenever you have the air conditioningsystem serviced, make sure the servicef acility uses a ref rigerant recyclingsystem. This system captures theref rigerant f or reuse. Releasingref rigerant into the atmosphere candamage the environment.

The condenser and radiator f ins bendeasily. Only use a low-pressure sprayor sof t-bristle brush to clean them.

Page 250: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

To replace it:

The dust and pollen filter is locatedbehind the glove box.

Remove the dust and pollen filtercover by pushing in on the lock tab,then pulling the cover toward you.

The dust and pollen filter removespollen and dust that is brought infrom the outside through the heatingand cooling system.

This filter should be replaced every30,000 miles (48,000 km) undernormal conditions. It should bereplaced every 15,000 miles (24,000km) if you drive primarily in urbanareas that have high concentrationsof soot in the air from industry anddiesel-powered vehicles. Replace itmore often if air flow from theheating and cooling system becomesless than usual.

Open the glove box. Remove thehooks on the side panels bypushing on the end of each hookfrom the inside of the glove box.Pivot the glove box out of the way.

1.

2.

Replacement

Dust and Pollen Filter

Maintenance246

HOOKS

TAB

COVER

Page 251: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Remove the first filter by pulling itstraight out of the air conditioningunit. Remove the second filter bysliding it to the left, then pulling itout.

Remove the old filter from thefilter case.

Install the new filter in the case.Make sure the ‘‘AIR FLOW’’arrows on the filter and the filtercase face the same direction.

Install the dust and pollen filtersinto the air conditioning unit.Make sure the ‘‘AIR FLOW’’arrows on the filter pointdownward.

Reinstall the dust and pollen filtercover.

Pivot the glove box up intoposition. Reinstall the hooks intothe side panel of the glove box.Close the glove box.

If you are not sure how to replacethe dust and pollen filters, have themreplaced by your Honda dealer.

3. 4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

Dust and Pollen Filter

Maintenance 247

DUST AND POLLEN FILTERS

Page 252: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Check the condition of the drive belt.Examine the edges of the belt forcracks or fraying.

An auto-tensioner adjusts the tensionof the drive belt. The pointer on theauto-tensioner should be in theproper range. It should be checkedaccording to the time and distancerecommendations in themaintenance schedule.

If the pointer is out of this range oryou see signs of wear, have the drivebelt replaced by your Honda dealeras soon as possible.

Drive Belt

Maintenance248

Proper rangePOINTER

Page 253: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

To safely operate your vehicle, yourtires must be the proper type andsize, in good condition with adequatetread, and correctly inflated. Thefollowing pages give more detailedinformation on how and when tocheck air pressure, how to inspectyour tires for damage and wear, andwhat to do when your tires need tobe replaced.

Keeping the tires properly inflatedprovides the best combination ofhandling, tread life, and ridingcomfort. Underinflated tires wearunevenly, adversely affect handlingand fuel economy, and are morelikely to fail from being overheated.Overinflated tires can make yourvehicle ride more harshly, are moreprone to damage from road hazards,and wear unevenly.

We recommend that you visuallycheck your tires every day. If youthink a tire might be low, check itimmediately with a tire gauge.

Use a gauge to measure the airpressure at least once a month. Eventires that are in good condition maylose one to two psi (10 to 20 kPa, 0.1to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per month.Remember to check the spare tire atthe same time you check all theother tires.

Check the pressure in the tires whenthey are cold. This means the vehiclehas been parked for at least threehours. If you have to drive thevehicle before checking the tirepressure, the tires can still beconsidered ‘‘cold’’ if you drive lessthan 1 mile (1.6 km).

Add or release air, if needed, tomatch the recommended cold tirepressures on page .250

Inflation

Tires

Maintenance 249

Using tires that are excessivelyworn or improperly inflated cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding tireinflation and maintenance.

Page 254: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

If you check the pressure when thetires are hot [the vehicle has beendriven several miles (kilometers)],you will see readings 4 to 6 psi (30 to40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4 kgf/cm ) higherthan the cold reading. This is normal.Do not let air out to match thespecified cold pressure. The tire willbe underinflated.

You should get your own tirepressure gauge and use it wheneveryou check your tire pressures. Thiswill make it easier for you to tell if apressure loss is due to a tire problemand not due to a variation betweengauges.

The following chart shows therecommended cold tire pressures formost normal driving conditions andspeeds. Tire pressures for highspeed driving are the same as fornormal driving.

The compact spare tire pressure is:

For convenience, the recommendedtire sizes and cold air pressures areon a label on the driver’s doorjamb.

For additional technical informationabout your tires, see page .

Tubeless tires have some ability toself-seal if they are punctured.However, because leakage is oftenvery slow, you should look closelyfor punctures if a tire starts losingpressure.

308

Tire Size Cold Tire Pressurefor Normal DrivingFront:

Rear:

Recommended Tire Pressures forNormal Driving

Tires

Maintenance250

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

P215/70R16 99S32 psi (220 kPa ,2.2 kgf/cm )

34 psi (235 kPa ,2.4 kgf/cm )

Page 255: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Every time you check inflation, youshould also examine the tires fordamage, foreign objects, and wear.

You should look for:

Bumps or bulges in the tread orside of the tire. Replace the tire ifyou find either of these conditions.

Excessive tread wear.

In addition to proper inflation,correct wheel alignment helps todecrease tire wear. If you find a tireis worn unevenly, have your dealercheck the wheel alignment.

Cuts, splits, or cracks in the sideof the tire. Replace the tire if youcan see fabric or cord.

The tires were properly balanced bythe factory. They may need to berebalanced at some time before theyare worn out. Have your dealercheck the tires if you feel a consis-tent vibration while driving. A tireshould always be rebalanced if it isremoved from the wheel for repair.

Your vehicle’s tires have wear indica-tors molded into the tread. When thetread wears down to that point, youwill see a 5/16 inch (7.9 mm) wideband running across the tread. Thisshows there is less than 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) of tread left on the tire. Atire that is this worn gives very littletraction on wet roads. You shouldreplace the tire if you can see thetread wear indicator in three or moreplaces around the tire.

CONTINUED

Inspection Maintenance

Tires

Maintenance 251

INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS

TREAD WEAR INDICATORS

Page 256: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

When shopping for replacementtires, you may find that some tiresare ‘‘directional.’’ This means theyare designed to rotate only in onedirection. If you use directional tires,they should be rotated only front-to-back.

Make sure the installer balances thewheels when you have new tiresinstalled. This increases ridingcomfort and tire life. Your vehicle’soriginal tires were dynamic or ‘‘spin’’balanced at the factory. For bestresults, have the installer perform adynamic balance.

To help increase tire life anddistribute wear more evenly, youshould have the tires rotated every10,000 miles (16,000 km). Move thetires to the positions shown in thechart each time they are rotated.

(Only on vehicles equipped withaluminum wheels)

Tire Rotation

Tires

Maintenance252

Front Front

(For Non-directionalTires and Wheels)

(For DirectionalTires and Wheels)

Improper wheel weights can damageyour vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Useonly genuine Honda wheel weights f orbalancing.

Page 257: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

It is best to replace all four tires atthe same time. If that is not possibleor necessary, then replace the twofront tires or the two rear tires as apair. Replacing just one tire canseriously affect your vehicle’s han-dling.

The tires that came with yourvehicle were selected to match theperformance capabilities of thevehicle while providing the bestcombination of handling, ridecomfort, and long life. You shouldreplace them with radial tires of thesame size, load range, speed rating,and maximum cold tire pressurerating (as shown on the tire’ssidewall). Mixing radial and bias-plytires on your vehicle can reduce itsbraking ability, traction, and steeringaccuracy.

The ABS works by comparing thespeed of the wheels. When replacingtires, use the same size originallysupplied with the vehicle. Tire sizeand construction can affect wheelspeed and may cause the system towork inconsistently.

If you ever need to replace a wheel,make sure the wheel’s specificationsmatch those of the original wheelthat came on your vehicle. Re-placement wheels are available atyour Honda dealer.

Replacing Tires and Wheels

Tires

Maintenance 253

Installing improper tires on yourvehicle can affect handling andstability. This can cause a crashin which you can be seriouslyhurt or killed.

Always use the size and type oftires recommended in thisowner’s manual.

Page 258: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

+ If you mount snow tires on yourHonda, make sure they are radialtires of the same size and load rangeas the original tires. Mount snowtires on all four wheels to balanceyour vehicle’s handling in all weatherconditions. Keep in mind the tractionprovided by snow tires on dry roadsmay not be as high as your vehicle’soriginal equipment tires. You shoulddrive cautiously even when the roadsare clear. Check with the tire dealerfor maximum speed recommenda-tions.

Wheels:

Tires:

See page for information aboutDOT Tire Quality Grading.

Tires that are marked ‘‘M S’’ or‘‘All Season’’ on the sidewall have anall-weather tread design. Theyshould be suitable for most winterdriving conditions. Tires withoutthese markings are designed foroptimum traction in dry conditions.They may not provide adequateperformance in winter driving.For the best performance in snowyor icy conditions, you should installsnow tires or tire chains. They maybe required by local laws undercertain conditions.

308

Snow TiresWheels and Tires Winter Driving

Tires

Maintenance254

16 x 6 1/2JJ

P215/70R16 99S

Page 259: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Because your Honda has limited tireclearance, mount only SAE Class ‘‘S’’cable-type traction devices on thefront tires. Use traction devices onlywhen required by driving conditionsor local laws. Make sure they are thecorrect size for your tires.

Metal link-type ‘‘chains’’ should notbe used. No matter how tight theyseem to be installed, they can comeinto contact with the body andsuspension, causing serious damage.

When installing cables, follow themanufacturer’s instructions andmount them as tightly as you can.Drive slowly with them installed. Ifyou hear them coming in contactwith the body or chassis, stop andinvestigate. Make sure the cables areinstalled tightly, and that they arenot contacting the brake lines orsuspension. Remove them as soon asyou begin driving on cleared roads.

Tire Chains

Tires

Maintenance 255

Traction devices that are the wrongsize or improperly installed candamage your vehicle’s brake lines,suspension, body, and wheels. Stopdriving if they are hitting any part ofthe vehicle.

Page 260: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Check the operation of your vehicle’sexterior lights at least once a month.A burned out bulb can create anunsafe condition by reducing yourvehicle’s visibility and the ability tosignal your intentions to otherdrivers.

Lights

Maintenance256

FRONT TURN SIGNAL/PARKING LIGHT

HEADLIGHT SIDE MARKER LIGHT

Page 261: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Check the following:

If you find any bulbs are burned out,replace them as soon as possible.Refer to the chart on page todetermine what type of replacementbulb is needed.

Headlights (low and high beam)Parking lightsTaillightsBrake lightsHigh-mount brake lightTurn signalsBack-up lightsHazard light functionLicense plate lightsSide marker lightsDaytime running lights(Canadian models)

307

Lights

Maintenance 257

BRAKE/TAILLIGHTS

TURN SIGNAL LIGHT

LICENSE PLATE LIGHTS

BACK-UP LIGHT

HIGH-MOUNT BRAKE LIGHT

Page 262: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

The headlights were properly aimedwhen your vehicle was new. If youregularly carry heavy items in thecargo area or pull a trailer,readjustment may be required.Adjustment of the headlights shouldbe performed by a Honda technicianor other qualified mechanic.

Your vehicle has halogen headlightbulbs, one on each side. Whenreplacing a bulb, handle it by its steelbase and protect the glass fromcontact with your skin or hardobjects. If you touch the glass, cleanit with denatured alcohol and a cleancloth.

Open the hood.If you need to change theheadlight bulb on the driver’s side,remove the front end of the airintake duct by pulling it out.

1.

Lights

Maintenance

Headlight Aiming Replacing a Headlight Bulb

258

Halogen headlight bulbs get very hotwhen lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratchon the glass can cause the bulb tooverheat and shatter.

Page 263: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by pulling theconnector straight back.

Remove the rubber weather sealby pulling on the tab.

Unclip the end of the hold-downwire from its slot. Pivot it out ofthe way and remove the bulb.

Insert the new bulb into the hole,making sure the tabs are in theirslots. Pivot the hold-down wireback in place, and clip the end intothe slot.

Install the rubber seal over theback of the headlight assembly.Make sure it is right side up; it ismarked ‘‘TOP.’’

Push the electrical connector ontothe new bulb. Make sure it isconnected securely.Turn on the headlights to test thenew bulb.

(Driver’s side)Install the front end of the airintake duct.

Open the hood. The frontparking/turn signal light is next tothe headlight bulb. On the driver’sside, remove the front end of theair intake duct by pulling it out.

Remove the socket from theheadlight assembly by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

2.

CONTINUED

Lights

Maintenance

Replacing a Front Parking/TurnSignal Light Bulb

259

Page 264: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket. Push the new bulb straightinto the socket until it bottoms.

Insert the socket back into theheadlight assembly. Turn itclockwise to lock it in place.

Test the lights to make sure thenew bulb is working.

Place a cloth between the trim ofthe lens and the body, at the top ofthe lens. Remove the front sidemarker light assembly by carefullyprying on the trim of the lens witha small flat-tipped screwdriver.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket. Push the new bulb straightinto the socket until it bottoms.

Install the front end of the airintake duct.

(Driver’s side)

Remove the socket from the lightassembly by turning it one-quarterturn counterclockwise.

1.

3.

4.

5.

2.

3.

6.

Lights

Maintenance

Replacing a Front Side MarkerLight Bulb

260

Page 265: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Turn on the lights to make surethe new bulb is working.

Put the light assembly back intothe body, bottom first. Push on thetop edge until it snaps into place.

Open the hatch and the tailgate.Remove the two mounting screwswith a Phillips-head screwdriver,and remove the taillight assemblyfrom the body by pulling it back.

Determine which of the threebulbs is burned out: brake/taillight, turn signal light or back-up light.

Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket. Push the new bulb straightinto the socket until it bottoms.

Put the socket back into the lightassembly and turn it clockwise tolock it in place.

1.

4.

5.

2.

3.

4.

6.

CONTINUED

Lights

Maintenance

Replacing Rear Bulbs

261

Page 266: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket. Push the new bulb in untilit bottoms in the socket.

Turn on the parking lights andcheck that the new bulb isworking.

Reinstall the socket into the lightassembly by turning it clockwiseuntil it locks.

Test the lights to make sure thenew bulb is working.

When reinstalling the taillightassembly, first place the two pinsin the holes in place. Tighten thetwo mounting bolts.

Place a cloth and insert a smallflat-tipped screwdriver betweenthe left edge of the lens and thehousing. The lens will come down.

Put the lens back into the lightassembly, right side first. Push onthe left edge until it snaps intoplace.

1.

2.

6.

7.

3.

4.

5. Replacing a Rear License PlateBulb

Lights

Maintenance262

Page 267: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket.Push the new bulb straight intothe socket until it bottoms.

Test the lights to make sure thenew bulb is working.

Put the socket back into the lightassembly and turn it clockwise tolock it in place.

Put the cover back onto the lightassembly. Push it on until it locksin place.

Remove the socket from the lightassembly by turning it one-quarterturn counterclockwise.

Open the hatch. Remove the lightassembly cover by pushing in onthe tabs on both sides and pullingthe cover down.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Replacing a High-mount BrakeLight Bulb

Maintenance

Lights

263

Page 268: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Remove the lens by carefullyprying on the edge of the lens witha fingernail file or a small flat-tipscrewdriver. Do not pry on theedge of the housing around thelens.

Although the ceiling light, cargo arealight, and spotlights come apart thesame way, they do not use the sametype of bulbs.

Ceiling light:Pry on the rear edge of the lensnear both sides.

Spotlights:Pry on the rear edge of the lens inthe middle.

Cargo area light:Pry on the front edge of the lensnear both sides.

1.

Replacing Interior Light Bulbs

Lights

Maintenance264

CEILING LIGHT SPOTLIGHTS

Page 269: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Remove the bulb by pulling itstraight out of its metal tabs.

Push the new bulb into the metaltabs. Snap the lens back in place.

3.

2.

Lights

Maintenance 265

CARGO AREA LIGHT

Page 270: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

If you need to park your vehicle foran extended period (more than onemonth), there are several things youshould do to prepare it for storage.Proper preparation helps preventdeterioration and makes it easier toget your vehicle back on the road. Ifpossible, store your vehicle indoors.

Block the rear wheels.

If the vehicle is to be stored for alonger period, it should besupported on jackstands so thetires are off the ground.

Leave one window open slightly (ifthe vehicle is being storedindoors).

Cover the vehicle with a‘‘breathable’’ cover, one madefrom a porous material such ascotton. Nonporous materials, suchas plastic sheeting, trap moisture,which can damage the paint.

Fill the fuel tank.

Change the engine oil and filter(see page ).

Wash and dry the exteriorcompletely.

Clean the interior. Make sure thecarpeting, floor mats, etc. arecompletely dry.

To minimize sticking, apply asilicone spray lubricant to all doorand tailgate seals. Also, apply avehicle body wax to the paintedsurfaces that mate with the doorand tailgate seals.

Support the front and rear wiperblade arms with a folded towel orrag so they do not touch thewindshield.

Disconnect the battery.

Leave the parking brake off. Putthe transmission in Reverse(5-speed manual) or Park(automatic).

If possible, run the engine for awhile periodically (preferably oncea month).

If you store your vehicle for 12months or longer, have your Hondadealer perform the inspections calledfor in the 24 months maintenanceschedule (Normal Conditions) assoon as you take it out of storage(see page ). The replacementscalled for in the maintenanceschedule are not needed unless thevehicle has actually reached thattime or mileage.

223

212

Storing Your Vehicle

Maintenance266

Page 271: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Regular cleaning and polishing ofyour Honda helps to keep it ‘‘new’’looking. This section gives youinformation on how to clean yourvehicle and preserve its appearance:the paint, brightwork, wheels, andinterior. Also included are severalthings you can do to help preventcorrosion.

.................................Exterior Care . 268.....................................Washing . 268

.......................................Waxing . 269....................Aluminum Wheels . 269

..........................Paint Touch-up . 270..................................Interior Care . 271

..........................Floor Covering . 271.........................................Fabric . 271

...........................................Vinyl . 271...................................Seat Belts . 271....................................Windows . 272

..........................Air Fresheners . 272....................Corrosion Protection . 273

.................................Body Repairs . 274

Appearance Care

Appearance Care

267

Page 272: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Frequent washing helps preserveyour vehicle’s beauty. Dirt and gritcan scratch the paint, while tree sapand bird droppings can permanentlyruin the finish.

Wash your vehicle in a shady area,not in direct sunlight. If the vehicle isparked in the sun, move it into theshade and let the exterior cool downbefore you start.

When you have washed and rinsedthe whole exterior, dry it with achamois or soft towel. Letting itair-dry will cause dulling and waterspots.

As you dry the vehicle, inspect it forchips and scratches that could allowcorrosion to start. Repair them withtouch-up paint (see page ).

Rinse the vehicle thoroughly withcool water to remove loose dirt.

Only use the solvents and cleanersrecommended in this Owner’sManual.

Fill a bucket with cool water. Mixin a mild detergent, such asdishwashing liquid or a productmade especially for vehiclewashing.

Check the body for road tar, treesap, etc. Remove these stains withtar remover or turpentine. Rinse itoff immediately so it does notharm the finish. Remember to re-wax these areas, even if the rest ofthe vehicle does not need waxing.

Wash the vehicle using the waterand detergent solution and a soft-bristle brush, sponge, or soft cloth.Start at the top and work your waydown. Rinse frequently.

270

Exterior Care

Appearance Care

Washing

268

Chemical solvents and strong cleanerscan damage the paint, metal, andplastic on your vehicle.

The radio antenna on your vehicle doesnot need to be removed when you use a‘‘drive-through’’ vehicle wash. How-ever, if you remove the antenna, makesure to reinstall it and tighten it se-curely using an appropriate tool.

Page 273: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Always wash and dry the wholevehicle before waxing it. You shouldwax your vehicle, including the metaltrim, whenever water sits on thesurface in large patches. It shouldform into beads or droplets afterwaxing.

Polishes Polishes and cleaner/waxes can restore the shine to paintthat has oxidized and lost some of itsshine. They normally contain mildabrasives and solvents that removethe top layer of the finish. Youshould use a polish on your Honda ifthe finish does not have its originalshine after using a wax.

Clean your Honda’s aluminum alloywheels as you do the rest of theexterior. Wash them with the samesolution, and rinse them thoroughly.

The wheels have a protective clear-coat that keeps the aluminum fromcorroding and tarnishing. Usingharsh chemicals, including somecommercial wheel cleaners or stiffbrushes, can damage this clear-coat.Only use a mild detergent and softbrush or sponge to clean the wheels.

Cleaning tar, insects, etc. withremovers also takes off the wax.Remember to re-wax those areas,even if the rest of the vehicle doesnot need waxing.

Waxes A wax coats the finish andprotects it from damage by exposureto sunlight, air pollution, etc. Youshould use a wax on your Hondawhen it is new.

You should use a quality liquid orpaste wax. Apply it according to theinstructions on the container. Ingeneral, there are two types ofproducts:

On some models

Exterior Care

Appearance Care

Waxing Aluminum Wheels

269

Page 274: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Your dealer has touch-up paint tomatch your vehicle’s color. The colorcode is printed on a sticker on thedriver’s doorjamb. Take this code toyour dealer so you are sure to getthe correct color.

Inspect your vehicle frequently forchips or scratches in the paint.Repair them right away to preventcorrosion of the metal underneath.Use the touch-up paint only on smallchips and scratches. More extensivepaint damage should be repaired bya professional.

Appearance Care

Exterior Care

Paint Touch-up

270

Page 275: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Remove dirt and dust with a vacuumcleaner. Wipe the vinyl with a softcloth dampened in a solution of mildsoap and water. Use the samesolution with a soft-bristle brush onmore difficult spots. You can also usecommercially-available spray orfoam-type vinyl cleaners.

If your seat belts get dirty, you canuse a soft brush with a mixture ofmild soap and warm water to cleanthem. Do not use bleach, dye, orcleaning solvents. They can weakenthe belt material. Let the belts air-dry before you use the vehicle.

Remove dirt and dust with a vacuumcleaner. For general cleaning, use asoft cloth dampened in a solution ofmild soap and water, then dry with asoft cloth.

Vacuum dirt and dust out of thematerial frequently. For generalcleaning, use a solution of mild soapand lukewarm water, letting it air dry.To clean off stubborn spots, use acommercially-available fabric cleaner.Test it on a hidden area of the fabricfirst, to make sure it does not bleachor stain the fabric. Follow theinstructions that come with thecleaner.

CONTINUED

Vinyl Seat BeltsFloor Covering

Fabric

Interior Care

Appearance Care 271

LOOP

Page 276: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Dirt build-up in the loops of the seatbelt anchors can cause the belts toretract slowly. Wipe the insides ofthe loops with a clean clothdampened in mild soap and warmwater or isopropyl alcohol.

Clean the windows, inside and out,with a commercially-available glasscleaner. You can also use a mixtureof one part white vinegar to ten partswater. This will remove the haze thatbuilds up on the inside of thewindows. Use a soft cloth or papertowels to clean all glass and clearplastic surfaces.

If you want to use an air freshener/deodorizer in the interior of yourvehicle, it is best to use a solid type.Some liquid air fresheners containchemicals that may cause parts ofthe interior trim and fabric to crackor discolor.

If you use a liquid air freshener,make sure you fasten it securely so itdoes not spill as you drive.

Windows Air Fresheners

Interior Care

Appearance Care272

The rear window def ogger wires arebonded to the inside of the glass.Wiping vigorously up-and-down candislodge and break the def ogger wires.When cleaning the rear window, usegentle pressure and wipe side-to-side.

Page 277: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Use a high-pressure spray to cleanthe underside of your vehicle. Thisis especially important in areasthat use road salt in winter. It isalso a good idea in humid climatesand areas subject to salt air.Vehicles equipped with ABS havea sensor and wiring at each wheel.Be careful not to damage them.

Many corrosion-preventive measuresare built into your Honda. You canhelp keep your vehicle fromcorroding by performing somesimple periodic maintenance:

Repair chips and scratches in thepaint as soon as you discover them.

Two factors normally contribute tocausing corrosion in your vehicle:

Moisture trapped in body cavities.Dirt and road salt that collects inhollows on the underside of thevehicle stays damp, promotingcorrosion in that area.

Removal of paint and protectivecoatings from the exterior andunderside of the vehicle.

Inspect and clean out the drainholes in the bottom of the doorsand body.

Check the floor coverings fordampness. Carpeting and floormats may remain damp for a longtime, especially in winter. Thisdampness can eventually causethe floor panels to corrode.

Have the corrosion-preventivecoatings on the underside of yourvehicle inspected and repairedperiodically.

1.

2.

Corrosion Protection

Appearance Care 273

Page 278: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

When reporting your collision to theinsurance company, tell them youwant genuine Honda parts used inthe repair. Although most insurersrecognize the quality of originalparts, some may try to specify thatthe repairs be done with otheravailable parts. You should investi-gate this before any repairs havebegun.

Take your vehicle to your authorizedHonda dealer for inspection after therepairs are completed. Your dealercan make sure that quality materialswere used, and that corrosion-preventive coatings were applied toall repaired and replaced parts.

Body repairs can affect your vehicle’sresistance to corrosion. If yourvehicle needs repairs after a collision,pay close attention to the parts usedin the repair and the quality of thework.

Make sure the repair facility usesgenuine Honda replacement bodyparts. Some companies make sheetmetal pieces that seem to duplicatethe original Honda body parts, butare actually inferior in fit, finish, andcorrosion resistance. Once installed,they do not give the same high-quality appearance.

Body Repairs

Appearance Care274

Page 279: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

This section covers the more-common problems that motoristsexperience with their vehicles. Itgives you information about how tosafely evaluate the problem and whatto do to correct it. If the problem hasstranded you on the side of the road,you may be able to get going again.If not, you will also find instructionson getting your vehicle towed.

......................Compact Spare Tire . 276....................Changing a Flat Tire . 277

..........If Your Engine Won’t Start . 283Nothing Happens or the StarterMotor Operates Very

.....................................Slowly . 283The Starter Operates

................................Normally . 284

................................Jump Starting . 285............If Your Engine Overheats . 288

.........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 290..........Charging System Indicator . 291

.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 292.......................Readiness Codes . 293

...............Brake System Indicator . 294..............................................Fuses . 295

..........Checking and Replacing . 296......................Emergency Towing . 301

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Taking Care of the Unexpected 275

Page 280: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Your vehicle has a compact sparetire that takes up less space. Use thisspare tire as a temporary replace-ment only. Get your regular tirerepaired or replaced and put it backon your vehicle as soon as you can.

The compact spare tire has a shortertread life than a regular tire. Replaceit when you can see the tread wearindicator bars. The replacementshould be the same size and designtire, mounted on the same wheel.The compact spare tire is notdesigned to be mounted on a regularwheel, and the compact wheel is notdesigned for mounting a regular tire.

Check the inflation pressure of thecompact spare tire every time youcheck the other tires. It should beinflated to:

This tire gives a harsher ride andless traction on some road sur-faces than the regular tire. Usegreater caution while driving onthis tire.

Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)under any circumstances.

Follow these precautions wheneveryou are using the compact spare tire:

Do not mount snow chains on thecompact spare.

Do not use the compact spare tireif you are towing a trailer.

The wheel of the compact sparetire is designed especially to fityour vehicle. Do not use yourspare tire on another vehicleunless it is the same make andmodel.

Compact Spare Tire

Taking Care of the Unexpected276

INDICATOR LOCATION MARK

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

Page 281: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

If you have a flat tire while driving,stop in a safe place to change it.Stopping in traffic or on the shoulderof a busy road is dangerous. Driveslowly along the shoulder until youget to an exit or an area to stop thatis far away from the traffic lanes.

Park the vehicle on firm, level andnon-slippery ground, away fromtraffic. Put the transmission inPark (automatic) or Reverse(manual). Apply the parking brake.

Turn on the hazard warning lights,and turn the ignition switch toLOCK (0). Have all thepassengers get out of the vehiclewhile you change the tire.

If you are towing a trailer, unhitchthe trailer.

Open the hatch and the tailgate.

The spare tire, jack, and tools areunder the cargo area floor.

1.

2.

3.

4.

CONTINUED

Changing a Flat Tire

Taking Care of the Unexpected 277

JACK SPARE TIRE

TOOLS

The vehicle can easily roll offthe jack, seriously injuringanyone underneath.

Follow the directions forchanging a tire exactly, andnever get under the vehiclewhen it is supported only by thejack.

Page 282: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Push the rear edge of the handleto raise the handle loop and pull upthe loop to raise the cargo areafloor.

Unscrew the wing bolt and takethe spare tire out of the cargo area.

Remove the tools and the jack. Toremove the jack, turn the jack’send bracket counterclockwise toloosen it.

Loosen the five wheel nuts 1/2turn with the wheel wrench.

8.7.

6.

5.

Changing a Flat Tire

Taking Care of the Unexpected278

JACK WHEEL NUTS

Page 283: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

CONTINUED

Locate the jacking point nearestthe tire you need to change. It ispointed to by an arrow molded intothe underside of the body. Placethe jack under the jacking point.Turn the end bracket clockwiseuntil the top of the jack contactsthe jacking point. Make sure thejacking point tab is resting in thejack notch.

Use the extension and wheelwrench as shown to raise thevehicle until the flat tire is off theground.

Remove the wheel nuts and flattire. Temporarily place the flat tireon the ground with the outsidesurface of the wheel facing up.Placing the wheel face down couldmar its finish.

9. 10. 11.

Changing a Flat Tire

Taking Care of the Unexpected 279

EXTENSION

WHEEL WRENCHJACKING POINTS

Page 284: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Before mounting the spare tire,wipe any dirt off the mountingsurface of the wheel and hub witha clean cloth. Wipe the hubcarefully, it may be hot fromdriving.

Put on the spare tire. Put thewheel nuts back on finger-tight,then tighten them in a crisscrosspattern with the wheel wrenchuntil the wheel is firmly againstthe hub. Do not try to tightenthem fully.

Lower the vehicle to the groundand remove the jack.

12. 13. 14.

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Changing a Flat Tire

280

BRAKE HUB

Page 285: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

CONTINUED

Tighten the wheel nuts securely inthe same crisscross pattern. Havethe wheel nut torque checked atthe nearest automotive servicefacility.Tighten the wheel nuts to:

Store the jack in its holder. Turnthe jack’s end bracket to lock it inplace. Store the tools.

Remove the center cap from theflat tire, and store it in the sparetire well.

Remove the wing bolt on the sparetire mount, and pivot the arm 90°to the upright position. Thentighten the wing bolt securely.

15.

16.

17.

18.

Changing a Flat Tire

Taking Care of the Unexpected 281

80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)

Loose items can fly around theinterior in a crash and couldseriously injure the occupants.

Store the wheel, jack, and toolssecurely before driving.

Page 286: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Remove the small round plug fromthe cargo area floor by pushing itfrom the back side to make a hole.Store the removed plug in a placeyou can easily remember.

Reinstall the cargo area floor.Place the flat tire face down on thecargo area floor.

Align the center of the flat tirewith the hole in the cargo areafloor. Remove the spacer conefrom the wing bolt, turn it over,and put it back on the bolt.

Secure the flat tire by screwingthe wing bolt to the spare tiremount through the hole in thecargo area floor.

20.19.

21.

22.

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Changing a Flat Tire

282

Page 287: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Diagnosing why your engine won’tstart falls into two areas, dependingon what you hear when you turn thekey to START (III):

You hear nothing, or almostnothing. The engine’s startermotor does not operate at all, oroperates very slowly.

You can hear the starter motoroperating normally, or the startermotor sounds like it is spinningfaster than normal, but the enginedoes not start up and run.

Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).Turn on the headlights and checktheir brightness. If the headlightsare very dim or don’t light at all,the battery is discharged. See

on page .

When you turn the ignition switch toSTART (III), you do not hear thenormal noise of the engine trying tostart. You may hear a clicking soundor series of clicks, or nothing at all.Check these things: Turn the ignition switch to START

(III). If the headlights do not dim,check the condition of the fuses. Ifthe fuses are OK, there is proba-bly something wrong with theelectrical circuit for the ignitionswitch or starter motor. You willneed a qualified technician todetermine the problem. (See

on page .)

Check the transmission interlock.If you have a manual transmission,the clutch pedal must be pushedall the way to the floor or thestarter will not operate. With anautomatic transmission, it must bein Park or Neutral.

285

301

CONTINUED

Nothing Happens or the StarterMotor Operates Very Slowly

Jump Starting

Emergency Towing

If Your Engine Won’t Start

Taking Care of the Unexpected 283

Page 288: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

If the headlights dim noticeably orgo out when you try to start theengine, either the battery is dis-charged or the connections arecorroded. Check the condition of thebattery and terminal connections(see page ). You can then tryjump starting the vehicle from abooster battery (see page ).

In this case, the starter motor’sspeed sounds normal, or even fasterthan normal, when you turn theignition switch to START (III), butthe engine does not run.

Are you using the proper startingprocedure? Refer to

on page .

There may be an electricalproblem, such as no power to thefuel pump. Check all the fuses(see page ).

If you find nothing wrong, you willneed a qualified technician to findthe problem. See

on page .

Your vehicle has the ImmobilizerSystem. You should use aproperly-coded master or valet keyto start the engine (see page ).A key that is not properly codedwill cause the immobilizer systemindicator in the dash panel to blinkrapidly.

Do you have fuel? Turn theignition switch to ON (II) for aminute and watch the fuel gauge.The low fuel level warning lightmay not be working, so you werenot reminded to fill the tank.

240

285

84

174

296

301

The Starter Operates Normally

Starting theEngine

EmergencyTowing

If Your Engine Won’t Start

Taking Care of the Unexpected284

Page 289: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

If your vehicle’s battery has rundown, you may be able to start theengine by using a booster battery.Although this seems like a simpleprocedure, you should take severalprecautions.

To jump start your vehicle, followthese directions closely:

Open the hood and check thephysical condition of the battery(see page ). In very coldweather, check the condition ofthe electrolyte. If it seems slushyor like ice, do not try jump startinguntil it thaws.

Turn off all the electrical acces-sories: heater, A/C, stereo system,lights, etc.

Put the transmission in Neutral orPark, and set the parking brake.

You cannot start a Honda with anautomatic transmission by pushingor pulling it.

1.

2.

240

CONTINUED

Jump Starting

Taking Care of the Unexpected 285

A battery can explode if you donot follow the correct procedure,seriously injuring anyonenearby.

Keep all sparks, open flames,and smoking materials awayfrom the battery.

If a battery sits in extreme cold, theelectrolyte inside can f reeze.Attempting to jump start with a f rozenbattery can cause it to rupture.

Page 290: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

-Connect one jumper cable to thepositive ( ) terminal on yourHonda’s battery. Connect theother end to the positive ( )terminal on the booster battery.

Connect the second jumper cableto the negative ( ) terminal onthe booster battery. Connect theother end to the grounding strapas shown. Do not connect thisjumper cable to any other part ofthe engine.

The numbers in the illustration showyou the order to connect the jumpercables.

If the booster battery is in anothervehicle, have an assistant startthat vehicle and run it at a fast idle.

3. 4.

5.

Jump Starting

Taking Care of the Unexpected286

BOOSTER BATTERY

Page 291: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Start your vehicle. If the startermotor still operates slowly, checkthe jumper cable connections tomake sure they have good metal-to-metal contact.

Once your vehicle is running,disconnect the negative cable fromyour vehicle, then from thebooster battery. Disconnect thepositive cable from your vehicle,then the booster battery.

Keep the ends of the jumper cablesaway from each other and any metalon the vehicle until all aredisconnected. Otherwise, you maycause an electrical short.

6.

7.

Jump Starting

Taking Care of the Unexpected 287

Page 292: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

If you see steam and/or spraycoming from under the hood, turnoff the engine.

If you do not see steam or spray,leave the engine running andwatch the temperature gauge. Ifthe high heat is due to overloading(climbing a long, steep hill on ahot day with the A/C running, forexample), the engine should startto cool down almost immediately.If it does, wait until the tempera-ture gauge comes down to the mid-point, then continue driving.

The pointer of your vehicle’stemperature gauge should stay inthe midrange under most conditions.It may go higher if you are driving upa long steep hill on a very hot day. Ifit climbs to the red mark, you shoulddetermine the reason.

Safely pull to the side of the road.Put the transmission in Neutral orPark, and set the parking brake.Turn off the heating and coolingsystem and all other accessories.Turn on the hazard warningindicators.

If the temperature gauge stays atthe red mark, turn off the engine.

Wait until you see no more signsof steam or spray, then open thehood.

Your vehicle can overheat for severalreasons, such as lack of coolant or amechanical problem. The onlyindication may be the temperaturegauge climbing to or above the redmark. Or you may see steam orspray coming from under the hood.In either case, you should takeimmediate action.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

If Your Engine Overheats

Taking Care of the Unexpected288

Steam and spray from anoverheated engine canseriously scald you.

Do not open the hood if steamis coming out.

Driving with the temperature gaugepointer at the red mark can causeserious damage to your engine.

Page 293: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Look for any obvious coolant leaks,such as a split radiator hose.Everything is still extremely hot,so use caution. If you find a leak, itmust be repaired before youcontinue driving (see

on page ).

If you don’t find an obvious leak,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank (see page

). If the level is below theMIN mark, add coolant to halfwaybetween the MIN and MAX marks.

Using gloves or a large heavycloth, turn the radiator capcounterclockwise, without pushingdown, to the first stop. Thisreleases any remaining pressure inthe cooling system. After thepressure releases, push down onthe cap and turn it until it comesoff.

Start the engine and set thetemperature control dial tomaximum. Add coolant to theradiator up to the base of the fillerneck. If you do not have theproper coolant mixture available,you can add plain water.Remember to have the coolingsystem drained and refilled withthe proper mixture as soon as youcan.

If there was no coolant in thereserve tank, you may also have toadd coolant to the radiator. Let theengine cool down until the pointerreaches the middle of the tempera-ture gauge, or lower, before check-ing the radiator.

Put the radiator cap back ontightly. Run the engine and watchthe temperature gauge. If it goesback to the red mark, the engineneeds repair. (See

on page .)

If the temperature stays normal,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. If it hasgone down, add coolant to theMAX mark. Put the cap back ontightly.

10.

9.

8.

7.

6.

11.

12.

301

301

163

EmergencyTowing

EmergencyTowing

If Your Engine Overheats

Taking Care of the Unexpected 289

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

Page 294: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Start the engine and watch the oilpressure indicator. If the lightdoes not go out within ten seconds,turn off the engine. There is amechanical problem that needs tobe repaired before you cancontinue driving. (See

on page .)

If necessary, add oil to bring thelevel back to the full mark on thedipstick (see page ).

This indicator should light when theignition switch is ON (II), and go outafter the engine starts. It shouldnever come on when the engine isrunning. If it starts flashing, itindicates that the oil pressuredropped very low for a moment, thenrecovered. If the indicator stays onwith the engine running, it showsthat the engine has lost oil pressureand serious engine damage ispossible. In either case, you shouldtake immediate action.

Safely pull off the road and shutoff the engine. Turn on the hazardwarning indicators.

Let the vehicle sit for a minute.Open the hood and check the oillevel (see page ). Although oillevel and oil pressure are notdirectly connected, an engine thatis very low on oil can lose pressureduring cornering and other drivingmaneuvers.

1.

2.

4.

3.

162

221

301Emergency

Towing

Low Oil Pressure Indicator

Taking Care of the Unexpected290

LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR

Running the engine with low oilpressure can cause serious mechanicaldamage almost immediately. Turn of fthe engine as soon as you can saf ely getthe vehicle stopped.

Page 295: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

This indicator should come on whenthe ignition switch is ON (II), and goout after the engine starts. If itcomes on brightly when the engineis running, it indicates that thecharging system has stoppedcharging the battery.

Immediately turn off all electricalaccessories: radio, heater, A/C, reardefogger, cruise control, etc. Try notto use other electrically-operatedcontrols such as the power windows.Keep the engine running and takeextra care not to stall it. Starting theengine will discharge the batteryrapidly.

By eliminating as much of theelectrical load as possible, you candrive several miles (kilometers)before the battery is too dischargedto keep the engine running. Drive toa service station or garage whereyou can get technical assistance.

Charging System Indicator

Taking Care of the Unexpected 291

CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR

Page 296: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

This indicator should light when theignition switch is ON (II), and go outafter the engine starts. If it comes onat any other time, it indicates one ofthe engine’s emissions controlsystems may have a problem. Eventhough you may feel no difference inyour vehicle’s performance, it canreduce your fuel economy and causeyour vehicle to put out excessiveemissions. Continued operation maycause serious damage.

You should also have the dealerinspect your vehicle if this indicatorcomes on repeatedly, even though itmay turn off as you continue driving.

If you have recently refueled yourvehicle, the cause of this indicatorcoming on could be a loose ormissing fuel fill cap. Check the capand tighten it until it clicks severaltimes. Replace the fuel fill cap if it ismissing. Tightening the cap will notmake the indicator turn offimmediately; it takes at least 3 daysof normal driving.

If the indicator remains on past that,or the fuel cap was not loose ormissing, have the vehicle checked bythe dealer as soon as possible. Drivemoderately until the dealer hasinspected the problem. Avoid full-throttle acceleration and driving athigh speed.

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Taking Care of the Unexpected292

MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP

If you keep driving with themalf unction indicator lamp on, you candamage your vehicle’s emissionscontrols and engine. Those repairs maynot be covered by your vehicle’swarranties.

Page 297: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

To check if they are set, turn theignition ON (II), but do not start theengine. The Malfunction IndicatorLamp will come on for 20 seconds. Ifit then goes off, the readiness codesare set. If it blinks 5 times, thereadiness codes are not set.

Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that are part of the on-boarddiagnostics for the emissionssystems. In some states, part of theemissions testing is to make surethese codes are set. If they are notset, the test cannot be completed.

If your vehicle’s battery has beendisconnected or gone dead, thesecodes are erased. It takes severaldays of driving under variousconditions to set the codes again.

If possible, do not take your vehiclefor a state emissions test until thereadiness codes are set. Refer toState Emissions Testing for moreinformation. (See page .)316

Readiness Codes

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Taking Care of the Unexpected 293

Page 298: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

If you must drive the vehicle a shortdistance in this condition, driveslowly and cautiously.

If it comes on at any other time, itindicates a problem with the vehicle’sbrake system. In most cases, theproblem is a low fluid level in thebrake fluid reservoir. Press lightly onthe brake pedal to see if it feelsnormal. If it does, check the brakefluid level the next time you stop at aservice station (see page ). If thefluid level is low, take the vehicle toyour dealer and have the brakesystem inspected for leaks or wornbrake pads.

However, if the brake pedal does notfeel normal, you should takeimmediate action. Because of thebrake system’s dual-circuit design, aproblem in one part of the systemwill still give you braking at twowheels. You will feel the brake pedalgo down much farther before thevehicle begins to slow down, and youwill have to press harder on thepedal. The distance needed to stopwill be much longer.

Slow down by shifting to a lowergear, and pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe. Because of thelonger distance needed to stop, it ishazardous to drive the vehicle. Youshould have it towed, and repaired assoon as possible. (See

on page .)

The Brake System Indicatornormally comes on when you turnthe ignition switch ON (II). It is areminder to check the parking brake.It comes on and stays lit if you do notfully release the parking brake.

If the ABS indicator comes on withthis indicator, have the vehicleinspected by your Honda dealerimmediately.

234301

On models equipped with ABS

EmergencyTowing

Brake System Indicator

Taking Care of the Unexpected294

BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR

U.S. indicator shown

Page 299: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

All the electrical circuits in yourvehicle have fuses to protect themfrom a short circuit or overload.These fuses are located in two fuseboxes.

The under-hood fuse box is locatedin the engine compartment on thedriver’s side. To open it, push thetabs as shown.

The interior fuse box is underneaththe steering column. To remove thefuse box lid, turn the knobscounterclockwise and pull the lid outof its hinges.

Fuses

Taking Care of the Unexpected 295

UNDER-HOOD

TAB

INTERIOR

Page 300: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

If something electrical in yourvehicle stops working, the first thingyou should check for is a blown fuse.Determine from the chart on pages

and , or the diagram on thefuse box lid, which fuse or fusescontrol that component. Check thosefuses first, but check all the fusesbefore deciding that a blown fuse isnot the cause. Replace any blownfuses and check the component’soperation.

Check each of the large fuses inthe under-hood fuse box bylooking through the top at the wireinside. Removing these fusesrequires a Phillips-head screw-driver.

Remove the cover from the fusebox.

Turn the ignition switch to LOCK(0). Make sure the headlights andall other accessories are off.

3.

1.

2.300299

Checking and Replacing Fuses

Fuses

Taking Care of the Unexpected296

FUSE

BLOWN

Page 301: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

CONTINUED

Look for a burned wire inside thefuse. If it is burned, replace it withone of the spare fuses of the samerating or lower.

Check the smaller fuses in theunder-hood fuse box and all thefuses in the interior fuse box bypulling out each fuse with the fusepuller provided in the under-hoodfuse box.

If you cannot drive the vehiclewithout fixing the problem, and youdo not have a spare fuse, take a fuseof the same rating or a lower ratingfrom one of the other circuits. Makesure you can do without that circuittemporarily (such as the accessorypower socket or radio).

If you replace the blown fuse with aspare fuse that has a lower rating, itmight blow out again. This does notindicate anything wrong. Replace thefuse with one of the correct rating assoon as you can.

5.4.

Fuses

Taking Care of the Unexpected 297

FUSE PULLERBLOWN

Page 302: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

If the replacement fuse of thesame rating blows in a short time,there is probably a seriouselectrical problem in your vehicle.Leave the blown fuse in thatcircuit and have your vehiclechecked by a qualified mechanic.

6.

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Fuses

298

Replacing a f use with one that has ahigher rating greatly increases thechances of damaging the electricalsystem. If you do not have a replace-ment f use with the proper rating f or thecircuit, install one with a lower rating.

Page 303: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

No.

No.

CONTINUED

Amps. Circuits Protected

Amps. Circuits Protected

12345

6789

10111213141516171819202122232425

15 A10 A10 A10 A

Ignition CoilAccessory Power SocketDaytime running lightsACGNot Used

7.5 A20 A

7.5 A10 A7.5 A7.5 A7.5 A10 A10 A20 A

15 A15 A

7.5 A20 A

20 A20 A

Power Window RelayAMPAccessory, RadioRear WiperMeterABSDaytime running lightsSRSRemote Control MirrorsLAF HeaterNot UsedFuel PumpAccessory Power SocketTurn Signal LightsFront WiperNot UsedFront Right Power WindowFront Left Power WindowNot UsedNot Used

: On Canadian models

Fuses

Taking Care of the Unexpected 299

INTERIOR FUSE BOX

Page 304: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

No. Circuits ProtectedAmps.

123456789

1011121314151617181920

Condenser FanSmall LightInterior LightCooling Fan MotorHazardIGPHorn, StopNot UsedBack UpABS MotorRear DefrosterHeater MotorPower WindowOptionLeft HeadlightDoor LockRight HeadlightABS F/SBatteryIgnition 1Spare Fuses

30 A15 A7.5 A20 A15 A15 A15 A

10 A30 A20 A40 A40 A40 A15 A20 A15 A30 A

100 A50 A

21 25 7.5A 30A

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Fuses

300

UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

Page 305: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

If your vehicle needs to be towed,call a professional towing service or,if you belong to one, an organizationthat provides roadside assistance.Never tow your vehicle behindanother vehicle with just a rope orchain. It is very dangerous.

The towtruck uses two pivoting arms that gounder the tires (front or rear) and liftthem off the ground. The other twotires remain on the ground.

There are three popular types ofprofessional towing equipment.

The operatorloads your vehicle on the back of atruck.

Any othermethod of towing will damage thedrive system. When you contact thetowing agency, inform them that aflat-bed is required.

Refer toon page

for non-emergency towinginformation.

The towtruck uses metal cables with hookson the ends. These hooks go aroundparts of the frame or suspension andcables lift that end of the vehicle offthe ground. Your vehicle’ssuspension and body can beseriously damaged.

198

Wheel Lift Equipment

Flat-bed Equipment

Sling-type Equipment

Never tow your vehicle withwheel lif t equipment.

This is the only way totransport your vehicle.

Towing Your VehicleBehind a Motorhome

This method oftowing your Element isunacceptable.

Emergency Towing

Taking Care of the Unexpected 301

Towing a 4WD Element with only twotires on the ground will damage partsof the 4WD system. It should betransported on a f lat-bed truck ortrailer.

Page 306: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

302

Page 307: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

The diagrams in this section giveyou the dimensions and capacities ofyour Honda, and the locations of theidentification numbers. It alsoincludes information you shouldknow about your vehicle’s tires andemissions control systems.

................Identification Numbers . 304................................Specifications . 306

DOT Tire Quality Grading......................(U.S. Vehicles) . 308

Uniform Tire Quality..................................Grading . 308.................................Treadwear . 308

......................................Traction . 308.............................Temperature . 309...........................Tire Information . 310.........................Oxygenated Fuels . 311

......Driving in Foreign Countries . 312

.......................Emissions Controls . 313.....................The Clean Air Act . 313

Crankcase Emissions Control....................................System . 313

Evaporative Emissions Control....................................System . 313

Onboard Refueling Vapor................................Recovery . 313

...Exhaust Emissions Controls . 314....................PGM-FI System . 314

Ignition Timing Control................................System . 314

Three Way Catalytic...........................Converter . 314

....................Replacement Parts . 314..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 315

..............State Emissions Testing . 316

Technical Information

Technical Information 303

Page 308: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Your vehicle has several identifyingnumbers located in various places.

The Vehicle Identification Number(VIN) is the 17-digit number yourHonda dealer uses to register yourvehicle for warranty purposes. It isalso necessary for licensing andinsuring your vehicle. The easiestplace to find the VIN is on a platefastened to the top of the dashboard.You can see it by looking throughthe windshield on the driver’s side. Itis also on the Certification label at-tached to the driver’s doorjamb(front edge of rear door), and isstamped on the engine compartmentbulkhead. The VIN is also providedin bar code on the Certification label.

Identif ication Numbers

Technical Information304

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

CERTIFICATION LABEL

Page 309: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

The Engine Number is stamped intothe engine block.

The Transmission Number is on alabel on top of the transmission.

Identif ication Numbers

Technical Information 305

ENGINE NUMBER MANUAL TRANSMISSION NUMBER

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER

Page 310: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

**

Specifications

Technical Information306

Dimensions

Weights

Capacities

Engine

169.3 in (4,300 mm)71.5 in (1,815 mm)70.4 in (1,788 mm)101.4 in (2,575 mm)62.1 in (1,577 mm)62.3 in (1,582 mm)

1.88 US gal (7.1 )

1.90 US gal (7.2 )

3.3 US qt (3.1 )

7.6 US qt (7.2 )

2.0 US qt (1.9 )

LengthWidthHeightWheelbaseTrack

Gross vehicle weight rating

1.43 US gal (5.4 )

3.1 US qt (2.9 )

1.45 US gal (5.5 )

6.9 US qt (6.5 )

5.6 US qt (5.3 )4.2 US qt (4.0 )4.4 US qt (4.2 )

15.9 US gal (60 )Fuel tank

Engine oil

Type

Bore x StrokeDisplacementCompression ratioSpark plugs

9.7 : 1144 cu-in (2,354 cm )

3.43 x 3.90 in (87.0 x 99.0 mm)

Water cooled 4-stroke DOHCVTEC 4-cylinder gasoline engine

See the certification label attachedto the driver’s doorjamb (frontedge of rear door).

See spark plug maintenancesection page 239 .

0.145 US gal (0.55 )

Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in theengine.Reserve tank capacity:

Excluding the oil remaining in the engine.

Enginecoolant

Automatictransmissionfluid

Manualtransmissionfluid

Reardifferentialfluid (4WD)Windshieldwasherreservoir

4.8 US qt (4.5 )2.6 US qt (2.5 )

1.3 US qt (1.2 )1.1 US qt (1.0 )

2.4 US qt (2.3 )2.3 US qt (2.2 )

Approx.

FrontRear

Change

Without filterTotal

1 :2 :

ChangeTotal

ChangeTotalChange

4WD2WD

Total4WD2WD

ChangeTotal

4WD2WD

ChangeTotal

U.S. VehiclesCanadaVehicles

Automatic Transmission

Manual Transmission

1

2

2

Including filter

Page 311: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

- -

--

--

---------

Specifications

Technical Information 307

Air Conditioning

Tires

Alignment

Fuses

Battery

Lights

HFC-134a (R-134a)16.9 18.7 oz (480 530 g)

SP-10

12 V 60/55 W (H4/HB2)

12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V

8 W4 CP8 W5 W18 W (21 CP)21/5 W21 W

Refrigerant typeCharge quantityLubricant type

P215/70R16 99SSizePressure

Toe-in

Camber

Caster 1°50’1°

0°13’0.08 in (2.0 mm)

0.0 in (0 mm)

Interior

Under-hood

12 V 21/5 W

12 V 3 CP

12 V 21 W

Capacity

See page 299 or the fuse labelattached to the inside of the fusebox door under the steeringcolumn.See page 300 or the fuse boxcover.

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )34 psi (235 kPa , 2.4 kgf/cm )

HeadlightsFront turn signal/parkinglightsFront side marker lightsRear turn signal lightsBrake/TaillightsBack-up lightsLicense plate lightsCeiling lightSpotlightsCargo area lightHigh-mount brake light

45 AH/20 HR12 V

FrontRearFrontRearFront

Front/RearFrontRear

Page 312: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

-The treadwear grade is a compara-tive rating based on the wear rate ofthe tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified governmenttest course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded100. The relative performance oftires depends upon the actual condi-tions of their use, however, and maydepart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits,service practices and differences inroad characteristics and climate.

The traction grades, from highest tolowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Thosegrades represent the tire’s ability tostop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions onspecified government test surfacesof asphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor tractionperformance.

Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking traction tests,and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peaktraction characteristics.

The tires on your vehicle meet allU.S. Federal Safety Requirements.All tires are also graded fortreadwear, traction, and temperatureperformance according toDepartment of Transportation(DOT) standards. The followingexplains these gradings.

Quality grades can be found whereapplicable on the tire sidewallbetween the tread shoulder and themaximum section width. Forexample:

All passenger car tires must conformto Federal Safety Requirements inaddition to these grades.

Treadwear Traction AA, A, B, C

Treadwear 200Traction AATemperature A

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

Technical Information308

Page 313: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

- Warning: The temperature grade forthis tire is established for a tire thatis properly inflated and not over-loaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-tion, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, cancause heat buildup and possible tirefailure.

The temperature grades are A (thehighest), B, and C, representing thetire’s resistance to the generation ofheat and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause the materialof the tire to degenerate and reducetire life, and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a level ofperformance which all passenger cartires must meet under the FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standard No.109. Grades B and A representhigher levels of performance on thelaboratory test wheel than theminimum required by law.

Temperature A, B, C

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

Technical Information 309

Page 314: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Whenever tires are replaced, theyshould be replaced with tires of thesame size. Following is an exampletire size with an explanation of whateach component means.

Vehicle type (P indicatespassenger vehicle).

Tire width in millimeters.

Aspect ratio (the tire’s sectionheight as a percentage of itswidth).

Tire construction code (Rindicates radial).

Load index (a numerical codeassociated with the maximumload the tire can carry).

Rim diameter in inches.

Speed symbol (analphabetical code indicatingthe maximum speed rating).

Tire Identification Number (TIN) isa group of numbers and letters thatlook like the following example TIN.

This indicates that the tiremeets all requirements ofthe U.S. Department ofTransportation.

Manufacturer’sidentification mark.

Tire type code.

Date of manufacture.The tires that came on your vehiclehave a number of markings. Thoseyou should be aware of are describedbelow.

P

R

16

DOT

B97R

FW6X

2202

215

70

99

S

Technical Information

Tire Information

Tire Labeling

Tire Size

Tire Identif ication Number

310

P215/70R16 99S

DOT B97R FW6X 2202

Page 315: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Some conventional gasolines arebeing blended with alcohol or anether compound. These gasolinesare collectively referred to asoxygenated fuels. To meet clean airstandards, some areas of the UnitedStates and Canada use oxygenatedfuels to help reduce emissions.

If you use an oxygenated fuel, besure it is unleaded and meets theminimum octane rating requirement.

Before using an oxygenated fuel, tryto confirm the fuel’s contents. Somestates/provinces require thisinformation to be posted on thepump.

The following are the U.S. EPA andCanadian CGSB approvedpercentages of oxygenates:

(methyl or woodalcohol)Your vehicle was not designed to usefuel that contains methanol.Methanol can corrode metal parts inthe fuel system, and also damageplastic and rubber components. Thisdamage would not be covered byyour warranties.

(Methyl Tertiary ButylEther)You may use gasoline containing upto 15 percent MTBE by volume.

(ethyl or grain alcohol)You may use gasoline containing upto 10 percent ethanol by volume.Gasoline containing ethanol may bemarketed under the name ‘‘Gasohol.’’

If you notice any undesirableoperating symptoms, try anotherservice station or switch to anotherbrand of gasoline.

Fuel system damage or performanceproblems resulting from the use ofan oxygenated fuel containing morethan the percentages of oxygenatesgiven above are not covered underwarranty.

METHANOL

MTBE

ETHANOL

Oxygenated Fuels

Technical Information 311

Page 316: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

If you are planning to take yourHonda outside the U.S. or Canada,contact the tourist bureaus in theareas you will be traveling in to findout about the availability of unleadedgasoline with the proper octanerating.

If unleaded gasoline is not available,be aware that using leaded gasolinein your Honda will affect perfor-mance and fuel mileage, and damageits emissions controls. It will nolonger comply with U.S. andCanadian emissions regulations, andwill be illegal to operate in NorthAmerica. To bring your vehicle backinto compliance will require the re-placement of several components,such as the oxygen sensors and thethree way catalytic converter. Thesereplacements are not covered underwarranty.

Driving in Foreign Countries

Technical Information312

Page 317: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

The burning of gasoline in yourvehicle’s engine produces several by-products. Some of these are carbonmonoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen(NOx) and hydrocarbons (HC).Gasoline evaporating from the tankalso produces hydrocarbons. Con-trolling the production of NOx, CO,and HC is important to the environ-ment. Under certain conditions ofsunlight and climate, NOx and HCreact to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’Carbon monoxide does not contri-bute to smog creation, but it is apoisonous gas.

The United States Clean Air Actsets standards for automobileemissions. It also requires thatautomobile manufacturers explain toowners how their emissions controlswork and what to do to maintainthem. This section summarizes howthe emissions controls work.Scheduled maintenance is on page

.

In Canada, Honda vehicles complywith the Canadian emissionrequirements, as specified in anagreement with EnvironmentCanada, at the time they aremanufactured.

Your vehicle has a PositiveCrankcase Ventilation System. Thiskeeps gasses that build up in theengine’s crankcase from going intothe atmosphere. The Positive Crank-

case Ventilation valve routes themfrom the crankcase back to theintake manifold. They are thendrawn into the engine and burned.

The Onboard Refueling VaporRecovery (ORVR) system capturesthe fuel vapors during refueling. Thevapors are adsorbed in a canisterfilled with activated carbon. Whiledriving, the fuel vapors are drawninto the engine and burned off.

As gasoline evaporates in the fueltank, an evaporative emissionscontrol canister filled with charcoaladsorbs the vapor. It is stored in thiscanister while the engine is off. Afterthe engine is started and warmed up,the vapor is drawn into the engineand burned during driving.

211

The Clean Air Act

Crankcase Emissions ControlSystem

Onboard Refueling VaporRecovery

Evaporative Emissions ControlSystem

Emissions Controls

Technical Information 313

Page 318: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

The exhaust emissions controlsinclude three systems: PGM-FI,Ignition Timing Control, and ThreeWay Catalytic Converter. Thesethree systems work together tocontrol the engine’s combustion andminimize the amount of HC, CO, andNOx that comes out the tailpipe. Theexhaust emissions control systemsare separate from the crankcase andevaporative emissions controlsystems. The emissions control systems are

covered by warranties separate fromthe rest of your vehicle. Read yourwarranty manual for more informa-tion.

The emissions control systems aredesigned and certified to work to-gether in reducing emissions tolevels that comply with the Clean AirAct. To make sure the emissionsremain low, you should use only newgenuine Honda replacement parts ortheir equivalent for repairs. Usinglower quality parts may increase theemissions from your vehicle.

This system constantly adjusts theignition timing, reducing the amountof HC, CO, and NOx produced.

The PGM-FI System uses sequentialmultiport fuel injection.It has three subsystems: Air Intake,Engine Control, and Fuel Control.The Engine Control Module (ECM)or the Powertrain Control Module(PCM) uses various sensors todetermine how much air is goinginto the engine. It then controls howmuch fuel to inject under all operat-ing conditions.

The three way catalytic converter isin the exhaust system. Throughchemical reactions, it converts HC,CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaustto carbon dioxide (CO ), nitrogen(N ), and water vapor.

2

2

Replacement PartsExhaust Emissions Controls PGM-FI System

Ignition Timing Control System

Three Way Catalytic Converter

Emissions Controls

Technical Information314

Page 319: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

The three way catalytic convertercontains precious metals that serveas catalysts, promoting chemicalreactions to convert the exhaustgasses without affecting the metals.The catalytic converter is referred toas a three-way catalyst, since it actson HC, CO, and NOx. A replacementunit must be an original Honda partor its equivalent.

The three way catalytic convertermust operate at a high temperaturefor the chemical reactions to takeplace. It can set on fire any com-bustible materials that come near it.Park your vehicle away from highgrass, dry leaves, or other flamma-bles.

A defective three way catalyticconverter contributes to air pollution,and can impair your engine’s per-formance. Follow these guidelines toprotect your vehicle’s three waycatalytic converter.

Always use unleaded gasoline.Even a small amount of leadedgasoline can contaminate thecatalyst metals, making the threeway catalytic converter ineffective.

Keep the engine tuned-up.

Have your vehicle diagnosed andrepaired if it is misfiring, back-firing, stalling, or otherwise notrunning properly.

Three Way Catalytic Converter

Technical Information 315

THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER

Page 320: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

If you take your vehicle for a stateemissions test shortly after thebattery has been disconnected orgone dead, it may not pass the test.This is because of certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that must be set in the on-board diagnostics for the emissionssystems. These codes are erasedwhen the battery is disconnected,and set again only after several daysof driving under a variety ofconditions.

If the testing facility determines thatthe readiness codes are not set, youwill be requested to return at a laterdate to complete the test. If you mustget the vehicle re-tested within thenext two or three days, you cancondition the vehicle for re-testingby doing the following.

Make sure the gas tank is nearly,but not completely, full (around3/4).

Make sure the vehicle has beenparked with the engine off for 8hours or more.

Make sure the ambienttemperature is between 20° and95°F.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, start the engine and let itidle for 20 seconds.

Keep the vehicle in Park(automatic transmission) orNeutral (manual transmission).Increase the engine speed to 2,000rpm and hold it there until thetemperature gauge rises to at least1/4 of the scale (approximately 3minutes).

Testing of Readiness Codes

State Emissions Testing

Technical Information316

Page 321: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Then drive in city/suburbantraffic for at least 10 minutes.When traffic conditions allow, letthe vehicle coast for severalseconds without using theaccelerator pedal or the brakepedal.

If the testing facility determines thereadiness codes are still not set, seeyour Honda dealer.

Select a nearby lightly traveledmajor highway where you canmaintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph(80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20minutes. Drive on the highway inD (A/T) or 5th (M/T). Do not usethe cruise control. When trafficallows, drive for 90 secondswithout moving the acceleratorpedal. (Vehicle speed may varyslightly; this is okay.) If you cannotdo this for a continuous 90seconds because of trafficconditions, drive for at least 30seconds, then repeat it two moretimes (for a total of 90 seconds).

Technical Information

State Emissions Testing

317

Page 322: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

318

Page 323: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Customer Relations................................Information . 320

....................Warranty Coverages . 321Reporting Safety Defects

..........................(U.S. Vehicles) . 322.....................Authorized Manuals . 323

Warranty and Customer Relations

Warranty and Customer Relations 319

Page 324: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

When you call or write, please giveus this information:

Honda dealership personnel aretrained professionals. They shouldbe able to answer all your questions.If you encounter a problem that yourdealership does not solve to yoursatisfaction, please discuss it withthe dealership’s management. TheService Manager or GeneralManager can help. Almost allproblems are solved in this way.

If you are dissatisfied with thedecision made by the dealership’smanagement, contact your HondaCustomer Relations Office.

U.S. Owners:

Canadian Owners:

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. VirginIslands:

Vehicle Identification Number(see page )Name and address of the dealerwho services your vehicleDate of purchaseMileage on your vehicleYour name, address, and tele-phone numberA detailed description of theproblemName of the dealer who sold thevehicle to you

304

Warranty and Customer Relations

Customer Relations Information

320

CUSTOMER RELATIONSRELATIONS AVEC LA CLIENTÈLE

Honda Canada Inc.715 Milner AvenueToronto, ONM1B 2K8

Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909

Toronto (416) 287-4776

Bella InternationalP.O. Box 190816San Juan, Puerto Rico 00919-0816

Tel: (787) 250-4318American Honda Motor Co.Honda Automobile Customer ServiceMail Stop 500-2N-7D1919 Torrance BoulevardTorrance, California 90501-2746

Tel: (800) 999-1009

Page 325: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

a seatbelt that fails to function properly iscovered for the useful life of thevehicle.

providescoverage for as long as the pur-chaser of the muffler owns thevehicle.

covers your new vehicle, except forthe battery, emissions controlsystems and accessories, againstdefects in materials andworkmanship.

Your new Honda is covered by thesewarranties:

provides proratedcoverage for a replacement batterypurchased from a Honda dealer.

this warranty gives upto 100 percent credit toward areplacement battery.

these twowarranties cover your vehicle’s emis-sions control systems. Time, mileage,and coverage are conditional. Pleaseread the warranty manual for exactinformation.

covers all genuineHonda replacement parts againstdefects in materials and workman-ship.

genuine Honda Accessories arecovered under this warranty. Timeand mileage limits depend on thetype of accessory and other factors.Please read your warranty manualfor details.

all exterior body panels arecovered for rust-through from theinside for the specified time periodwith no mileage limit.

Restrictions and exclusions apply toall these warranties. Please read the2003 Honda Warranty Informationbooklet that came with your vehiclefor precise information on warrantycoverages. Your Honda’s originaltires are covered by theirmanufacturer. Tire warrantyinformation is in a separate booklet.

Please refer to the 2003 WarrantyManual that came with your vehicle.

Seat Belt Limited Warranty

Replacement Muffler LifetimeLimited Warranty

New Vehicle Limited Warranty

Replacement Battery LimitedWarranty

Original Equipment Battery LimitedWarranty

Emissions Control Systems DefectsWarranty and EmissionsPerformance Warranty

Replacement Parts LimitedWarranty

Accessory Limited Warranty

Rust Perforation Limited Warranty

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

Warranty Coverages

Warranty and Customer Relations 321

Page 326: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

To contact NHTSA, you may eithercall the Auto Safety Hotline toll-freeat 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 inWashington D.C. area) or write to:NHTSA, U.S. Department ofTransportation, Washington,D.C. 20590. You can also obtainother information about motorvehicle safety from the Hotline.

If you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in additionto notifying American Honda MotorCo., Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar com-plaints, it may open an investigation,and if it finds that a safety defectexists in a group of vehicles, it mayorder a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot becomeinvolved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, orAmerican Honda Motor Co., Inc.

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)

Warranty and Customer Relations322

Page 327: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

*2003

HON

Valid only for sales within the U.S. Canadian owners shouldcontact their authorized Honda dealer.The publications shown below can be purchased from Helm

Incorporated. You can order in any of three ways:Detach and mail the order form on the right half of this pageCall Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356Go online at

If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356

(credit card orders only)

Authorized Manuals

Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)

323

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356

OR

(NOTE: For Credit Card Holder Orders Only)

MINIMUM CREDIT CARD PURCHASE $10.00

Form Description

2003 Honda Element

Service Manual

2003 Honda Element

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual

2003 Honda Element

Body Repair Manual

2003 Honda Element

Owner’s Manual

2003 Element

Quick Start Guide

Order Form for Previous Years-

Indicate Year and Model Desired

Publication

Form Number

61SCV00

61SCV00EL

61SCV30

31SCV600

31SCVQ00

HON-R

Price

Each

$70.00

$50.00

$44.00

$34.00

$10.00

FREE

PUBLICATION NUMBERVEHICLE MODEL

Name YearQty

Price

Each

Total

Price

GRAND TOTAL

HANDLING CHARGE

Mich. Purchases

Add 6% Sales Tax

TOTAL MATERIAL

$6.00

Monday-Friday 8:00 A.M. 6:00 P.M. EST

By completing this form you can order the materials desired. You canpay by check or money order, or charge to your credit card. Mail toHelm Incorporated at the address shown on the back of the order form.

Prices are subject to change withoutnotice and without incurring obligation.

Orders are mailed within 10 days. Pleaseallow adequate time for delivery.

Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurringobligation.

www. helminc. com

Page 328: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

SHIP

TO

PAYMENT

This manual complements the Service Manual byproviding in-depth troubleshooting information for eachelectrical circuit in your vehicle.

This manual describes the procedures involved in thereplacement of damaged body parts.

This manual covers maintenance and recommendedprocedures for repair to engine and chassis components.It is written for the Journeyman mechanic, but is simpleenough for most mechanically-inclined owners to under-stand.

Authorized Manuals

Service Manual:

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:

Body Repair Manual:

324

NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name,and also the name of the person to whose attention the shipment shouldbe sent. For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the address shownbelow for a quotation.

P.O. BOX 07280·DETROIT, MICHIGAN 48207·1-800-782-4356

Customer Name Attention

Apartment Number

State & Zip CodeCity

Daytime Telephone Number

Check or money order enclosed payable to Helm Inc U.S. funds only.Do not send cash

MasterCard

VISA Check here if your billing address is differentfrom the shipping address shown above.

Account Number Expiration: Mo. Yr.

CUSTOMER SIGNATURE DATE

Street Address No P.O. Box Number

( )

These Publications cannot be returned for credit without receiving advance authorization within 14days of delivery. On returns, a restocking fee may be applied against the original order.

Page 329: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

CONTINUED

BatteryCharging System

...........................Indicator . 66, 291............................Jump Starting . 285

..............................Maintenance . 240............................Specifications . 307

..............................Before Driving . 157....................................Belts, Seat . 8, 50

.........................Beverage Holders . 110.................................Body Repairs . 274

Brakes...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 186

.............Break-in, New Linings . 158....................Bulb Replacement . 261

...........................................Fluid . 234.......................................Parking . 111

.................System Indicator . 66, 294........................Wear Indicators . 185

.............................Braking System . 185.................Break-in, New Vehicle . 158

..Brightness Control, Instruments . 77........................Brights, Headlights . 76

Bulb Replacement..........................Back-up Lights . 261

..............................Brake Lights . 261......................Cargo Area Light . 265

..............................Ceiling Light . 264................Front Parking Lights . 259

........Front Side Marker Lights . 260.................................Headlights . 258

.........High-mount Brake Light . 263...........................Interior Lights . 264

.................License Plate Lights . 262

...Accessories and Modifications . 165................................Accessories . 165

.Additional Safety Precautions . 166............................Modifications . 166

ACCESSORY (Ignition Key.......................................Position) . 86

............Accessory Power Sockets . 113....................Additives, Engine Oil . 222

.............................Airbag (SRS) . 10, 54.....................Air Cleaner Element . 236

..............Air Conditioning System . 118..............................Maintenance . 245

.........................................Usage . 118.......................Air Outlets (Vents) . 120.......................Air Pressure, Tires . 249

.........................Normal Driving . 250.......................Alcohol in Gasoline . 311

......................................Antifreeze . 225Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

...............................Indicator . 68, 188...................................Operation . 186

..............Anti-theft, Audio System . 152Anti-theft Steering Column

..............................................Lock . 85

..........................Appearance Care . 267...................Armrest, Driver’s Seat . 93

................................Audio System . 126...Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners . 52

.............Automatic Speed Control . 153..............Automatic Transmission . 178

..........................Capacity, Fluid . 306...............Checking Fluid Level . 231

.......................................Shifting . 179.Shift Lever Position Indicator . 178

................Shift Lever Positions . 179....................Shift Lock Release . 183

Index

A

B

I

Page 330: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Bulb Replacement............................Specifications . 307

...................................Spotlights . 264....................Turn Signal Lights . 259

..............................Bulbs, Halogen . 258

............................Capacities Chart . 306.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 60

..........................Cargo Area Light . 115.................................Cargo Hooks . 170

.............................Carrying Cargo . 167..............CAUTION, Explanation of . ii

..........................CD Changer . 134, 147..............................CD Player . 132, 145

...............................Ceiling Pocket . 112........................Certification Label . 304

............................................Chains . 255....................Changing a Flat Tire . 277

............Changing Engine Coolant . 227.................................Changing Oil . 223

........................................How to . 223......................................When to . 212

...Charging System Indicator . 66, 291............Checklist, Before Driving . 173

.....................................Child Safety . 24.......................................Child Seats . 29

......LATCH Anchorage System . 47...........................Lower Anchors . 47

............Tether Anchorage Point . 46....................Cleaner Element, Air . 236

Cleaning....................Aluminum Wheels . 269

......................................Exterior . 268.........................................Fabric . 271

..........................Floor Covering . 271.......................................Interior . 271

...................................Seat Belts . 271...........................................Vinyl . 271

....................................Windows . 272.................Clock, Setting the . 130, 142

...................................Clutch Fluid . 235........................CO in the Exhaust . 312

............Cold Weather, Starting in . 175...............Consumer Information . 320

.............Controls, Instruments and . 63Coolant

........................................Adding . 225....................................Checking . 163

.........................Proper Solution . 225...................................Replacing . 227

...................Temperature Gauge . 74....................Corrosion Protection . 273

Crankcase Emissions Control........................................System . 313

............Cruise Control Operation . 153........Customer Relations Office . 320

................DANGER, Explanation of . ii.......................................Dashboard . 64

................Daytime Running Lights . 77............Defects, Reporting Safety . 322

........................Defog and Defrost . 124................Defogger, Rear Window . 81..............Defrosting the Windows . 124

....................................Dimensions . 306...............Dimming the Headlights . 76

Dipstick..........Automatic Transmission . 231

..................................Engine Oil . 162..........................Directional Signals . 77

........Disc Brake Wear Indicators . 185.....................Disposal of Used Oil . 224

Doors..............Locking and Unlocking . 87

Index

CD

II

Page 331: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

CONTINUED

......................Power Door Locks . 87..........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 308

Downshifting, 5-speed Manual.............................Transmission . 176

.......................................Drive Belt . 248...........................................Driving . 171

....................................Economy . 164.........................In Bad Weather . 189

................In Foreign Countries . 312........................Driving Guidelines . 172

..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 246

..............................Economy, Fuel . 164............Emergencies on the Road . 275.............Battery, Jump Starting . 285...........Brake System Indicator . 294

................Changing a Flat Tire . 277.....Charging System Indicator . 291

..................Checking the Fuses . 296.....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 290...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 292

..................Overheated Engine . 288.........................Emergency Brake . 111

......................Emergency Flashers . 81

......................Emergency Towing . 301.......................Emissions Controls . 313

.............Emissions Testing, State . 316Engine

....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 74...................................Drive Belt . 248

......Engine Speed Limiter . 177, 182Malfunction Indicator

................................Lamp . 66, 292........Oil Pressure Indicator . 66, 290..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 221

...............................Overheating . 288............................Specifications . 306

.......................................Starting . 174......................Ethanol in Gasoline . 311

.Evaporative Emissions Controls . 313...............................Exhaust Fumes . 60

Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat........................................Belts by . 21

..................Exterior, Cleaning the . 268

............................Fabric, Cleaning . 271...................................Fan, Interior . 118

Features, Comfort and..............................Convenience . 117

....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 159Filters

................................Air Cleaner . 236.........................Dust and Pollen . 246

...............................................Oil . 2235-speed Manual Transmission

...............Checking Fluid Level . 232................................Shifting the . 176

.............Flashers, Hazard Warning . 81...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 277

Fluids..........Automatic Transmission . 231

..........................................Brake . 234.........................................Clutch . 235

..............Manual Transmission . 232..........................Power Steering . 235

.......................Rear Differential . 233..................Windshield Washer . 230

FM Stereo Radio...................................Reception . 143

...........................Folding Rear Seat . 99.....Foreign Countries, Driving in . 312

Index

E

F

III

Page 332: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

.............Halogen Headlight Bulbs . 258................................................Hatch . 89

..............Hazard Warning Flashers . 81Headlights

........................................Aiming . 258............Daytime Running Lights . 77

..................High Beam Indicator . 69........................Reminder Beeper . 76

........Replacing Halogen Bulbs . 258...................................Turning on . 76

..............................Head Restraints . 94.....................Heating and Cooling . 118

.............High Altitude, Starting at . 175.................High-Low Beam Switch . 76..............High-mount Brake Light . 263

....................................Hood Latch . 237.......................Hood, Opening the . 160

..............................................Horn . 3, 75...........................Hydraulic Clutch . 235

.................................Hydroplaning . 190

..........................Four-way Flashers . 81............................Front Airbags . 10, 54

.................................................Fuel . 158......................Fill Door and Cap . 159

...........................................Gauge . 73................Octane Requirement . 158

...............................Oxygenated . 311........................Reserve Indicator . 69

........................Tank, Filling the . 159.....................Fuses, Checking the . 296

...............Gas Mileage, Improving . 164..........................................Gasohol . 311.........................................Gasoline . 158

...............Fuel Reserve Indicator . 69...........................................Gauge . 73

................Octane Requirement . 158........................Tank, Filling the . 159

................Gas Station Procedures . 159Gauges

...Engine Coolant Temperature . 74...............................................Fuel . 73

...............................Speedometer . 72.................................Tachometer . 72

Gearshift Lever Positions..........Automatic Transmission . 179

5-speed Manual.........................Transmission . 177

..............................Glass Cleaning . 272........................................Glove Box . 91

...Identification Number, Vehicle . 304Ignition

..............................................Keys . 83...........................................Switch . 85

............Timing Control System . 314........................Immobilizer System . 84

.........Important Safety Precautions . 6.........Indicators, Instrument Panel . 65

...............................Infant Restraint . 34......................................Infant Seats . 34

......LATCH Anchorage System . 47...........................Lower Anchors . 47

..........Tether Anchorage Points . 46...................Inflation, Proper Tire . 249

.........................Normal Driving . 250.................................Inside Mirror . 106

.............................Inspection, Tire . 251............................Instrument Panel . 65

........Instrument Panel Brightness . 77...........................Interior Cleaning . 271

Index

G

H

I

IV

Page 333: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

CONTINUED

...............................Interior Lights . 114........................................Introduction . i

.................Jacking up the Vehicle . 279.......................................Jack, Tire . 277

................................Jump Starting . 285

..................................................Keys . 83

..................................Maintenance . 207...Owner Maintenance Checks . 219

.................................Record . 217-218......................Required Indicator . 70

..........................................Safety . 208.............................Schedule . 212-216

.Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 66, 292...................Manual Transmission . 176

........Manual Transmission Fluid . 232.........................Meters, Gauges . 65, 72

...................Methanol in Gasoline . 310

........................Mirrors, Adjusting . 106

...................Neutral Gear Position . 180..................New Vehicle Break-in . 158

.....................Normal Shift Speeds . 177...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i

...............Numbers, Identification . 304

...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 158.........................................Odometer . 73

...............................Odometer, Trip . 73..............Off-Highway Guidelines . 200

Oil........................Change, How to . 223......................Change, When to . 212......................Checking Engine . 162..............Pressure Indicator . 66, 290

Selecting Proper Viscosity......................................Chart . 222

...........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 86

.......................Label, Certification . 304.................Lane Change, Signaling . 77

..................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 17, 50...........LATCH Anchorage System . 47

Lights....................Bulb Replacement . 258

.......................................Indicator . 65.........................................Parking . 76

..................................Turn Signal . 77.....................................Load Limit . 168

......LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 85

Locks.......Anti-theft Steering Column . 85

............................Fuel Fill Door . 159....................................Glove Box . 91

.................................Power Door . 87........................................Tailgate . 90

........................Low Coolant Level . 163.........................Low Fuel Indicator . 69

...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 66, 290................................Lower Anchors . 47

...Lubricant Specifications Chart . 306.........................................Luggage . 167

Index

L M

K

JN

O

V

Page 334: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Onboard Refueling Vapor....................................Recovery . 313

..Operation in Foreign Countries . 312............................Outside Mirrors . 106

.......................................Overdrive . 181....................Overheating, Engine . 288

.......Owner Maintenance Checks . 219.........................Oxygenated Fuels . 311

..............................Paint Touch-up . 270..............Panel Brightness Control . 77

........................Park Gear Position . 179...........................................Parking . 184

...............................Parking Brake . 111Parking Brake and Brake

.................System Indicator . 66, 294.................................Parking Lights . 76

Parking Over Things that....................................Burn . 184, 314

.............................PGM-FI System . 314..................Polishing and Waxing . 269

............Pre-Drive Safety Checklist . 12.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 21

............................Protecting Adults . 13

...Additional Safety Precautions . 22.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 21

........................Protecting Children . 24.......................Protecting Infants . 34

.......Protecting Larger Children . 42.........Protecting Small Children . 38

Using Child Seats with.....................................Tethers . 46

.............................Using LATCH . 47

...................Radiator Overheating . 288.....Radio/CD Sound System . 126, 137

...........................Readiness Codes . 293.................Rear Differential Fluid . 233

.......................................Rear Doors . 88..Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement . 261

............................Rear Seat Access . 95..........................Rear Seat, Folding . 99

..........................Rear View Mirror . 106.................Rear Window Defogger . 81

.Rear Window Wiper and Washer . 80...............Reclining the Seat-Backs . 92

.......Recommended Shift Speeds . 177.............................Reminder Lights . 65

............Removing the Rear Seats . 101Replacement Information

.................Air Cleaner Element . 236..............Dust and Pollen Filter . 246

..........................Engine Coolant . 227................Engine Oil and Filter . 223

..........................................Fuses . 296................................Light Bulbs . 258

....................................Schedule . 210................................Spark Plugs . 238

...........................................Tires . 253.............................Wiper Blades . 242

Replacing Seat Belts After a............................................Crash . 53

Reserve Tank, Engine...............................Coolant . 163, 225

...............................Restraint, Child . 24..................Reverse Gear Position . 180

...........................Reverse Lockout . 183................................Rotation, Tire . 252

..................................Safety Belts . 8, 50.........Safety Defects, Reporting . 322...........Safety Checklist, Pre-Drive . 12

Index

RP

S

VI

Page 335: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

* CONTINUED

.................................Safety Features . 7.........................................Airbags . 10

..................................Door Locks . 11..........................Head Restraints . 11

.......................................Seat Belts . 8.....................Seats & Seat-Backs . 11

.............Safety Labels, Location of . 61...............................Safety Messages . ii

.....................................Seat Belts . 8, 50...............Additional Information . 50

.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 21Automatic Seat Belt

...............................Tensioners . 52.....................................Cleaning . 271

................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 17, 50................................Maintenance . 53

Reminder Light and................................Beeper . 50, 67

................................Replacement . 53...................System Components . 50

...............Use During Pregnancy . 21...Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 17

........................Seats, Adjusting the . 92...............................Serial Number . 304

...........................Service Intervals . 212

...........................Service Manual . 323

.........Service Station Procedures . 159..................Setting the Clock . 130, 142

.....Shift Lever Position Indicator . 178........................Shift Lock Release . 183

..............................Side Airbags . 10, 56....................Cutoff Indicator . 58, 67

Side Marker Lights, Bulb..............................Replacement . 260...............................Signaling Turns . 77

..........................................Skylight . 107..............Removing and Storing . 108

.....................................Snow Tires . 254...................Solvent-type Cleaners . 268

........................Sound System . 126, 137......................................Spare Tire . 276

................Spark Plugs, Replacing . 238....................Specifications Charts . 306

................................Speed Control . 153...................................Speedometer . 72

.......................................Spotlights . 114..........SRS, Additional Information . 54

...Additional Safety Precautions . 59.............................Airbag Service . 59

How the Side Airbag Cutoff...........Indicator Light Works . 58

..How the SRS Indicator Works . 57

How Your Front Airbags.........................................Work . 54

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 56........................SRS Components . 54

.............................SRS Indicator . 57, 67....START (Ignition Key Position) . 86

..............State Emissions Testing . 316.......................Starting the Engine . 174

In Cold Weather at High..................................Altitude . 175

................With a Dead Battery . 285........Steam Coming from Engine . 288

Steering Wheel..................................Adjustment . 82

.............Anti-theft Column Lock . 85...........Stereo Sound System . 126, 137....................Storing Your Vehicle . 266

Supplemental Restraint................................System . 10, 54......................................Servicing . 59

.........................SRS Indicator . 57, 67...................System Components . 54

..................................Synthetic Oil . 222

Index

VII

Page 336: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

.................Vehicle Capacity Load . 168......................Vehicle Dimensions . 306

....Vehicle Identification Number . 304.............................Vehicle Storage . 266

.....................................Ventilation . 121.................................................VIN . 304

...............................Vinyl Cleaning . 271..................................Viscosity, Oil . 222

.....................Underside, Cleaning . 273Unexpected, Taking Care

..........................................of the . 275....Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 308

........................Unleaded Gasoline . 158.....................Upholstery Cleaning . 271

.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 224

.....................................Tachometer . 72Tailgate

............................Open Indicator . 70.................................Opening the . 90

..........Taillights, Changing Bulbs . 261.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 275

Technical Descriptions......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 308.....Emissions Control Systems . 313

.....................Oxygenated Fuels . 311Three Way Catalytic

...............................Converter . 315.......................Temperature Gauge . 74

..............Tether Anchorage Points . 46............................Theft Protection . 152

..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 315..................Time, Setting the . 130, 142

....................................Tire Chains . 255.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 277

...........................Tire Information . 310...............................................Tires . 249

..............................Air Pressure . 249.........................Checking Wear . 251

......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 308

......................................Inflation . 249..................................Inspection . 251

..............................Maintenance . 251...................................Replacing . 253

......................................Rotating . 252...........................................Snow . 254

............................Specifications . 307................................Tire Chains . 255

...................Tools, Tire Changing . 277Towing

.....................................A Trailer . 191...............Behind a Motorhome . 198

................................Emergency . 301Transmission

Checking Fluid Level,..............................Automatic . 231

Checking Fluid Level,...................................Manual . 232

..................Fluid Selection . 231, 232..............Identification Number . 304.............Shifting the Automatic . 178

..................Shifting the Manual . 176.....................................Treadwear . 308.......................................Trip Meter . 73

....................................Turn Signals . 77.............WARNING, Explanation of . ii.........Warning Labels, Location of . 61

..................Warranty Coverages . 321

Index

T U

V

W

VIII

Page 337: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Washers, Windshield........Checking the Fluid Level . 228

.....................................Operation . 79.........................................Washing . 268

..................Waxing and Polishing . 269Wheels

...............Adjusting the Steering . 82............Alignment and Balance . 251

......................................Wrench . 279Windows

.....................................Cleaning . 272................Operating the Power . 103

...........................Rear, Defogger . 81Windshield

.......................................Cleaning . 78...................................Defroster . 124

.....................................Washers . 230Wipers, Windshield

.......................Changing Blades . 242.....................................Operation . 78

....................................Worn Tires . 251.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 301

: U.S. and Canada only

Index

IX

Page 338: 2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual …techinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AE10303OM/enu/E...2003 Element Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

Service Information Summary

Gasoline:

Fuel Tank Capacity:

Recommended Engine Oil:

5-speed Manual TransmissionFluid:

Rear Differential Fluid:

Brake Fluid:

Tire Pressure (measured cold):

Automatic Transmission Fluid:

Power Steering Fluid:

Spare Tire Pressure:

15.9 US gal (60 )

Unleaded gasoline, pump octanenumber of 86 or higher.

Capacity (including differential): 32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

Honda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 orDOT 4 brake fluid as a temporaryreplacement (see page ).

2.0 US qt (1.9 )API Premium grade 5W-20detergent oil (see page ).

Oil change capacity (includingfilter):

4.4 US qt (4.2 )

Honda ATF-Z1 (AutomaticTransmission Fluid) preferred, ora DEXRON III ATF as atemporary replacement (see page

).

Honda Dual Pump Fluid. Do notuse ATF (see page ).

Capacity:1.1 US qt (1.0 )

Honda Power Steering Fluidpreferred, or another brand ofpower steering fluid as atemporary replacement. Do notuse ATF (see page ).

Honda Manual TransmissionFluid preferred, or an SAE 10W-30or 10W-40 motor oil as atemporary replacement (see page

).Front:

Rear:34 psi (235 kPa , 2.4 kgf/cm )

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

221

231

232

233

235

234